Fire 93 Bunk Room RenoAT
PRO」圧Ctt MANUAL
FOR
B∪NK ROOM RENOVA丁 |ON
OAK BROOK FIRE DEPARttMttNT
SttATION 93
725 ENTERPRISE DRIVE
OAK BROOK′ILLINOIS 60523
OWNER:
VILLACE OF OAK BROOK
1200 0AK BROOK ROAD
OAK BROOK′ILttNOIS 60523
」∪NE 12′2018
PROJECT NO.150952
:出 てFttiギ 鵠電器1∫F漱 :Tlil器 :∬∬1::棚 躍Ъ譜策attξ 窮憲;発 lC:TII:肌 W話 ∬
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROECT
BID PACKAGE
l. Invitation for Bidder's Proposals
2. General Instructions to Bidders
3. Bidder's Proposal
4. Bidder's Sworn Acknowledgement
5. Bidder's Sworn Work History Statement
6. Notice of Award
7. Contract
Contractor' s Certification
Attachment A: Supplemental Schedule of Contract Terms
Attachment B: Specifications
Attachment C: List of Drawings
Attachment D: Special Project Requirements
Appendix 1: Prevailing Wages
Appendix 2: Form of Performance Bond
Appendix 3: Form of Labor and Materials Bond
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STAT10N 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROJECT
BID PACKAGE
INVITATION FOR BIDDER'S PROPOSALS
OWNER: Village of Oak Brook
1200 Oak Brook Road
Oak Brook, Illinois 60523
l. Invitation to Bid
Owner invites sealed Bidder's Proposals for the Work described in detail in the Contract
and generally described as follows:
Provide and install all materials needed for the renovation of the existing Fire Station 93 Bunk
Room. The demolition of the existing flooring materials in the bunk room shall be part of the base
bid. The general contractor shall provide and install all materials, unless noted otherwise. The
scope of work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following:
General interior demolition of existing walls and flooring, new metal stud framing with gypsum
wall board finish; wood trim, new electrical receptacles and fixtures, modification of existing
electrical can lights, ceiling patching, painting, and install all new casework including the legacy
lockers, as well as finished wood bases, end panels, hardware and all accessories as shown on the
drawings and described herein.
Alternate Bidding will include the following:
l. Provide and install new carpeting in Fire Station 93 Bunk Room. Demolition for this work
is part of the base bid.
The Work shall be performed at the following Work Site:
Oak Brook Fire Station 93,725 Enterprise Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523
2. The Bid Packaee
The Bid Package consists of the following documents, all of which are by this reference
made a part of this Invitation for Bidder's Proposals as though fully set forth herein:
A. Invitation for Bidder's Proposals;
B. General Instructions to Bidders;
INVITATION
Addenda, if any are issued during the bidding process;
Bidder's Proposal;
Bidder' s Sworn Acknowledgement;
Bidder's Swom Work History Statement;
Other information submitted by Bidder, if requested during the bidding process;
Notice of Award; and
I. Contract, including all of its attachments and appendices, if any.
4. Inspection and Examination
Bid Documents may be obtained in two ways:
l. Via the Intemet at www.oak-brook.org, at no charge.
2. A paper hard copy may be obtained in person from Owner's Purchasing Division,
Butler Government Center, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523.
The Bid Package may be examined at the office of Owner as listed above. In making
copies of the Bid Package available to prospective Bidders, Owner does so only for the purpose of
obtaining Bidder's Proposals and such provision does not confer a license or grant for any other
use.
Each prospective Bidder shall, before submitting its Bidder's Proposal, carefully examine
the Bid Package. Each prospective Bidder shall inspect in detail the Work Site and the surrounding
area and shall familiaize itself with all local conditions, including subsurface, underground and
other concealed conditions, affecting the Contract, the Work and the Work Site. The Bidder whose
Bidder's Proposal is accepted will be responsible for all elrors in its Bidder's Proposal including
those resulting from its failure or neglect to make a thorough examination and investigation of the
Bid Package and the conditions of the Work Site and the surrounding area.
The Contract specifications may include the Illinois Department of Transportation's
General Conditions of the Contract, "State of Illinois Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction" (SSRB); "Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Main Construction in
Illinois" (SSWS); "ilinois Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways"
(MUTCD). The specifications also may include Owners' Village Code and Building Code.
References to any of these manuals, codes, and specifications means the latest editions effective
on the date of the bid opening.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
-2-
INVITATION
5. Pre-Bid Meetine
Every prospective bidder is required to attend a Pre-bid Meeting and Walk-Thru scheduled
for 10:00 A.M., Tuesday, June 19, 2018, at the Oak Brook Fire Station 93,725 Enterprise
Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523,, to review the scope of the improvements and the project
specifications. Failure to attend this mandatory meeting will disqualiff the bidder.
6. Bid Openine
Owner will receive sealed Bidder's Proposals for the Work until 10:00 a.m., local time,
Thursday, June 28, 2018, in the Samuel E. Dean Board Room, at the Butler Government
Center located at 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523, at which time, or as soon
thereafter as possible, all Bidder's Proposals will be publicly opened and read aloud. Bidders or
their agents are invited to be present.
7. Bid Securitv. Bonds and Insurance
A. Bid Security. Each Bidder's Proposal shall be accompanied by a security deposit
of at least 5 percent of the Bidder's Price Proposal in the form of (l) a Cashier's Check or Certified
Check drawn on a solvent bank insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation and payable
without condition to Owner or (2) a Bid Bond in a form satisfactory to Owner from a surety
company licensed to do business in the State of Illinois with a general rating of A minus and a
financial size category of Class X or better in Best's Insurance Guide.
B. Performance and Payment Bonds. The successful Bidder will be required to furnish
a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond on award of the Contract, each in
the penal sum of the full amount of the Contract Price, on forms provided by, or otherwise
acceptable to, Owner, from a surety company meeting the requirements set forth above. Each
Bidder's Proposal must be accompanied by a letter from such a surety company stating that it will
execute Bonds on forms provided by, or otherwise acceptable to, Owner, on award of the Contract
to Bidder.
C. Insurance. The successful Bidder will be required to furnish certificates of
insurance as required by Section 4.2 of the Contract on award of the Contract. Each Bidder's
Proposal must be accompanied by a letter from Bidder's insurance carrier or its agent certifying
that said insurer has read the requirements set forth in the Contract and will issue the required
certificates and policies of insurance on award of the Contract to Bidder.
DATED: June 14,2018
Village of Oak Brook
Charlotte K. Pruss
Village Clerk
-3-
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROECT
BID PACKAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
Interpretation of Documents Included in Bid Package ....................1
Calculation of Unit Price Proposals........... ....................2
Prevailing Wages .......................2
Taxes and Benefits............... ........................2
Permits and Licenses.............. ......................2
Preparation of Bidder's Proposal .................3
Signature Requirements................ ...............3
Bid Security............... ................4
Submission of Bidder's Proposals ...............5
Withdrawal of Bidder's Proposals ...............5
Qualification of Bidders................ ...............5
Disqualification of Bidders........... ...............6
Award of Contract ......................6
Notice of Award; Effective Date of Award............ .......7
Finalization of Contract .............7
Failure to Execute ......................8
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROECT
BID PACKAGE
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Interpretation of Documents Included in Bid Packase
A. Defined Terms. All terms capitalizedin these General Instructions to Bidders and
in the other documents included in the Bid Package are defined in the documents included in the
Bid Package and shall have such defined meanings wherever used.
B. Implied Terms. If any personnel, equipment, materials, or supplies that are not
directly or indirectly set forth in the Contract are nevertheless necessary to the proper provision,
performance, and completion of the whole of the Work in accordance with the intent of the
Contract, each prospective Bidder shall understand such personnel, equipment, materials, or
supplies to be implied and shall provide for such personnel, equipment, materials, or supplies in
its Bidder's Proposal as fully as if it were particularly described.
C. Information Provided by Owner. When information pertaining to subsurface,
underground or other concealed conditions, soils analysis, borings, test pits, utility locations or
conditions, buried structures, condition of existing structures, and other preliminary investigations
is distributed with the Bid Package, or such information is otherwise made available to any
prospective Bidder by Owner, such information is distributed or made available solely for the
convenience of such prospective Bidder and is not part of the Bid Package. Owner assumes no
responsibility whatever in respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of any such information, and there
is no guaranty or warranty, either expressed or implied, that the conditions indicated are
representative of those existing throughout the Work or the Work Site, or that the conditions
indicated are representative of those existing at any particular location, or that unanticipated
conditions may not be present.
D. Addenda. No interpretation of the documents included within the Bid Package will
be made except by written addendum duly issued by Owner ("Addendum"). No interpretation not
contained in an Addendum shall be valid or have any force or effect whatever, nor entitle any
Bidder to assert any claim or demand against Owner on account thereof.
All Addenda issued prior to the opening of Bidder's Proposals shall become a part of the Bid
Package. Each prospective Bidder shall be responsible for inquiring from time to time as to the
availability of Addenda.
INSTRUCTIONS
If any prospective Bidder is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the Bid Package, such
prospective Bidder shall submit to Owner a written request for an interpretation thereof as far in
advance of the scheduled opening of Bidder's Proposals as possible.
Owner shall use its best efforts to issue Addenda in response to all valid, appropriate, and timely
inquiries, but accepts no responsibility for doing so. Inquiries not answered by Addenda shall be
considered invalid, inappropriate, or untimely inquiries.
2, Calculation of Unit Price Proposals
On all items for which Bidder's Proposals are to be received on a unit price basis, the
approximate quantities stated in the Schedule of Prices are Owner's estimate only for Owner's
convenience in comparing Bidder's Proposals and shall not be relied on by Prospective Bidders.
Each prospective Bidder shall, before submitting its Bidder's Proposal, make its own estimate of
the quantities of Unit Price ltems required to complete the Work.
3. Prevailing Wases
In accordance with the Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq., not less than the
prevailing rate of wages for similar work in the locality in which the Work is to be performed shall
be paid to all laborers. Specific provisions relating to the Prevailing Wage Act, and required of
the Contractor, are included in the Contract. A copy of Owner's ordinance ascertaining the
prevailing rate of wages in effect as of the date of the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals, is included
in the Bid Package. If the Illinois Department of Labor revises the prevailing rate of hourly wages
to be paid, the revised rate shall apply to the Contract.
4. Taxes and Benefits
Owner is exempt from state and local sales, use, and excise taxes. Bidder's Price Proposal
shall not include any such taxes. A letter of exemption will be provided to the successful Bidder,
if necessary. Owner will not reimburse, nor assist the successful Bidder in obtaining
reimbursement for, any state or local sales, use or excise taxes paid by the successful Bidder.
Bidder's Price Proposal shall include all other applicable federal, state, and local taxes of
every kind or nature applicable to the Work as well as all taxes, contributions, and premiums for
unemployment insurance, old age or retirement benefits, pensions, annuities or other similar
benefits.
5. Permits and Licenses
Except as otherwise expressly provided in Attachment A to the Contract, Bidder's Price
Proposal shall include the cost of obtaining all permits, licenses, and other approvals and
authorizations required by law for performance of the Work. It shall be the sole responsibility of
each prospective Bidder to determine the applicable permits, licenses, and other approvals and
authorizations and no extra compensation shall be paid by Owner for the successful Bidder's
failure to include these costs in its Bidder's Proposal.
…2¨
INSTRUCTIONS
6. Preparation of Bidder's Proposal
Bidder's Proposals to enter into the Contract for the Work shall be made only on the blank
Bidder's Proposal form furnished by Owner and included in the Bid Package.
The Village requests that proposals are written legibly in ink. In case of any conflict
between words and numbers, words shall prevail. In case of any error in adding or multiplying
individual items, the prices listed for individual items shall control over any incorrect total of such
items. A Bidder's Proposal may be rejected if it does not contain a requested price for each and
every item named in the Bidder's Proposal form or may be interpreted as bidding "no charge" to
Owner for any item left blank.
Prospective Bidders are warned against making alterations of any kind to the Bidder's
Proposal form or to any entry thereon. Bidder's Proposals that contain omissions, conditions,
alterations, or additions not called for may be rejected or interpreted so as to be most favorable to
Owner.
Each Bidder shall securely staple into its Bidder's Proposal a copy of each Addendum
issued and shall include in the place provided therefor in the Bidder's Proposal form a listing of
all such Addenda.
Each Bidder shall complete and securely staple into its Bidder's Proposal the Bidder's
Sworn Acknowledgement and the Bidder's Sworn Work History Statement included in the Bid
Package, and shall staple into its Bidder's Proposal the Bid Security and the surety and insurance
commitment letters as specified in the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals.
Every Bidder submitting a Bidder's Proposal shall be conclusively deemed to have
evidenced an intention to be bound thereby whether or not the requirements for signing Bidder's
Proposals found in Section 7 of these General Instructions to Bidders are satisfied. However, ar,y
Bidder's Proposal that fails to comply with Section 7 of these General Instructions to Bidders may
nevertheless be rejected.
Bidder's Proposals that are not submitted on the Bidder's Proposal form furnished by
Owner or that are not prepared in accordance with these General Instructions to Bidders may be
rejected. If a deficiently prepared Bidder's Proposal is not rejected, Owner may demand correction
of any deficiency and award the Contract to Bidder on satisfactory compliance with these General
Instructions to Bidders.
7. SignatureRequirements
A. Bidder's Proposals. The following requirements shall be observed in the signing
of each Bidder's Proposal:
(l) Corporations. Each Bidder's Proposal submitted by a corporation shall be
signed by the President or other authorized officer of the corporation and
(2)
(3)
(4)
INSTRUCTIONS
shall also bear the attesting signature of the Secretary or Assistant Secretary
of the corporation.
Partnerships. Each Bidder's Proposal submitted by a partnership shall be
signed by all of its general partners or by an attorney-in-fact.
Individuals. Each Bidder's Proposal submitted by an individual shall be
signed by such individual or by an attorney-in-fact.
Joint Ventures. Each Bidder's Proposal submitted by a joint venture shall
be signed by each signatory of the joint venture agreement by which such
joint venture was formed in accordance with the applicable provisions of
(1), (2), and (3) above or by an attorney-in-fact.
When requested by Owner, satisfactory evidence of the authority of the person or persons signing
on behalf of Bidder shall be furnished.
B. Other Documents. The signature requirements set forth in Subsection 7A shall
apply to all other documents in the Bid Package required to be executed by Bidder, Bidder's
sureties and Bidder's insurance representatives as well as to the Contract, the Contractor's
Certification, and all other required documentation related to the Contract.
8. Bid Securitv
A. Required Bid Security. Every Bidder's Proposal shall be accompanied by bid
security in the form of a Cashier's Check, Certified Check or Bid Bond as specified in the
Invitation for Bidder's Proposals (*Bid Security"), which Bid Security shall stand as a guaranty
that (l) Bidder will submit all additional information requested by Owner; (2) if such Bidder's
Proposal is accepted, Bidderwill timely file the Bonds and the certificates and policies of insurance
required by the Contract; and (3) if such Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder will timely execute
the Contract, the Contractor's Certification, and all other required documentation related to the
Contract.
B. Retum of Bid Security. Bid Security submitted in the form of Cashier's Checks or
Certified Checks will be returned within five days after execution of the Contract by Owner. Bid
Bonds will not be returned unless otherwise requested by Bidder.
C. Liquidated Damaees. If a Bidder fails to timely submit all additional information
requested by Owner, or if the successful Bidder fails to timely and properly submit all required
Bonds, certificates and policies of insurance, or ifthe successful Bidder fails to timely and properly
execute the Contract, the Contractor's Certification, and all other required documentation related
to the Contract, it will be difficult and impracticable to ascertain and determine the amount of
damage that Owner will sustain by reason of any such failure. For such reason, every Bidder shall,
by submitting its Bidder's Proposal, be deemed to agree that Owner shall have the right, at its
option in the event of any such default, to retain or recover as reasonably estimated liquidated
damages, and not as a penalty, the entire amount of the Bid Security or five percent of the Bidder's
-4-
INSTRUCTIONS
Price Proposal, whichever is greater, or to exercise any and all equitable remedies it may have
against the defaulting Bidder.
9. Submission of Bidder's Proposal
One copy of each Bidder's Proposal, properly signed, together with all other required
documents, shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope or package and shall be addressed and delivered
to the place, before the time, and in the manner designated in the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals.
All Bidder's Proposals received after the time for the opening of bids specified in the Invitation
for Bidder's Proposals will be re
Each sealed envelope or package containing a Bidder's Proposal shall be identified as such
and shall be marked with the title of the Contract and Bidder's full legal name. All Addenda will
be considered part of each Bidder's Proposal whether attached or not.
10. Withdrawal of Bidder's Proposal
Any Bidder's Proposal may be withdrawn at any time prior to the opening of any Bidder's
Proposal, provided that a request in writing, executed by Bidder in the manner specified in
Section 7 of these General tnstructions to Bidders, for the withdrawal of such Bidder's Proposal
is filed with Owner prior to the opening of any Bidder's Proposal. The withdrawal of a Bidder's
Proposal prior to opening of any Bidder's Proposal will not prejudice the right of Bidder to file a
new Bidder's Proposal.
No Bidder's Proposal shall be withdrawn without the consent of Owner for a period of
60 days after the opening of any Bidder's Proposal. Any Bidder's Proposal may be withdrawn at
any time following the expiration of said 60 day period, provided that a request in writing, executed
by Bidder in the manner specified in Section 7 of these General Instructions to Bidders, for the
withdrawal of such Bidder's Proposal is filed with Owner after said 60 day period. If no such
request is filed, the date for acceptance of such Bidder's Proposal shall be deemed to be extended
until such a request is filed or until Owner executes a Contract pursuant to the Invitation for
Bidder's Proposals or until Owner affirmatively and in writing rejects such Bidder's Proposal.
11. Oualification of Bidders
A. Factors. Owner intends to award the Contract only to a Bidder that furnishes
satisfactory evidence that it has the requisite experience, ability, capital, facilities, plant,
organization and staffing to enable it to perform the Work successfully and promptly and to
complete the Work for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time.
B. Additional Information. Owner reserves the right to require from any Bidder, prior
to award of the Contract, a detailed statement regarding the business and technical organizations
and plant of Bidder that is available for the Work. Information pertaining to financial resources,
experience of personnel, contract defaults, litigation history, and pending construction projects
may also be requested.
-5-
INSTRUCTIONS
C. Final Determination. The final selection of the successful Bidder shall be made on
the basis of the amount of the Bidder's Price Proposals, Owner's prior experience with the Bidders,
Owner's knowledge of the Bidders' performance on other relevant projects, any additional
information submitted by Bidders to satisff Owner that Bidders are adequately prepared to fulfill
the Contract, and all other relevant facts or matters mentioned in the Bid Package or that Owner
may legally consider in making its determination.
12. Disqualification of Bidders
A. More Than One Bidder's Proposal. No more than one Bidder's Proposal for the
Work described in the Contract shall be considered from any single corporation, partnership,
individual or joint venture, whether under the same or different names and whether or not in
conjunction with any other corporation, partnership, individual or joint venture. Reasonable
grounds for believing that any corporation, partnership, individual or joint venture is interested in
more than one Bidder's Proposal for the Work may cause the rejection of all Bidder's Proposals
in which such corporation, partnership, individual or joint venture is interested. Nothing contained
in this Subsection l2A shall prohibit any single corporation, partnership, individual or joint
venture, whether under the same or different names and whether or not in conjunction with any
other corporation, partnership, individual or joint venture, from submitting a bid or quoting prices
to more than one Bidder for equipment, materials and supplies or labor to be furnished as a
subcontractor or supplier.
B. Collusion. If there are reasonable grounds for believing that collusion exists among
any Bidders, all Bidder's Proposals of the participants in such collusion will not be considered.
C. Default. If a Bidder is or has been in default on a contract with Owner or in the
payment of monies due Owner, its Bidder's Proposal will not be considered.
13. Award of Contract
A. Reservation of Riehts. Owner reserves the right to accept the Bidder's Proposal
that is, in its judgment, the best and most favorable to the interests of Owner and the public; to
reject the low Price Proposal; to accept any item of any Bidder's Proposal; to reject any and all
Bidder's Proposals; to accept and incorporate corrections, clarifications ormodifications following
the opening of the Bidder's Proposals when to do so would not, in Owner's opinion, prejudice the
bidding process or create any improper advantage to any Bidder; and to waive irregularities and
informalities in the bidding process or in any Bidder's Proposal submitted; provided, however,
that the waiver of any prior defect or informality shall not be considered a waiver of any future or
similar defects or informalities, and Bidders should not rely on, or anticipate, such waivers in
submitting their Bidder' s Proposals.
B. Firm Offers. All Bidder's Proposals are firm offers to enter into the Contract and
no Bidder's Proposals shall be deemed rejected, notwithstanding acceptance of any other Bidder's
Proposal, until the Contract has been executed by both Owner and the successful Bidder or until
Owner affirmatively and in writing rejects such Bidder's Proposal.
-6…
INSTRUCTIONS
C. Time of Award. It is expected that the award of the Contract, if it is awarded, will
be made within 45 days following the opening of the Bidder's Proposals. Should administrative
difficulties be encountered after the opening of the Bidder's Proposals, including the annulment of
any award, that may delay an award or subsequent award beyond such 45 day period, Owner may
accept any Bidder's Proposal for which the date for acceptance has been extended as provided in
Section 10 of these General Instructions to Bidders in order to avoid the need for re-advertisement.
No Bidder shall be under any obligation to extend the date for acceptance of its Bidder's Proposal.
Failure of one or more of the Bidders or their sureties to extend the date for acceptance of its
Bidder's Proposal shall not prejudice the right of Owner to accept any Bidder's Proposal for which
the date for acceptance has been extended.
14. Notice of Award: Effective Date of Award
If the Contract is awarded by Owner, such award shall be effective when a Notice of Award
in the form included in the Bid Package has been delivered to the successful Bidder ("Effective
Date of Award"). Owner will prepare two copies of the Contract based on Bidder's Proposal and
will submit them to the successful Bidder with the Notice of Award.
15. Finalization of Contract
A. Finalization Date. Unless otherwise stated in the Notice of Award, the successful
Bidder shall satisfactorily complete all conditions precedent to signing the Contract before the lOth
day after the Effective Date of Award or within such extended period as Owner may, in the exercise
of its sole discretion, authorize in writing after issuance of the Notice of Award ("Finalization
Date").
B. Conditions Precedent to Finalization. On or before the Finalization Date, the
successful Bidder shall: (l) sign (see Section 7), date as of the Finalization Date, and submit to
Owner both copies of the Contract, the Contractor's Certification, and all other required
documentation related to the Contract on or before the Finalization Date; and (2) submit two
executed copies of all required Bonds dated as of the Finalization Date and all certificates and
policies of insurance.
Failure to timely execute or submit any of the aforesaid documents shall be grounds for the
imposition of liquidated damages as more specifically set forth in Section 8 above. If the submitted
documents or any of them fail to comply with these General Instructions to Bidders or the Contract
or are not timely executed and submitted, Owner may, in its sole discretion, annul the award or
allow the successful Bidder an opportunity to correct the deficiencies.
In no event will Owner execute the Contract until any and all such deficiencies have been cured
or Owner has received adequate assurances, as determined by Owner, of complete and prompt
performance.
C. Finalization. On the Finalization Date, and provided that all documents required to
be submitted prior to or on the Finalization Date have been reviewed and determined by Owner to
be in compliance with these General Instructions to Bidders and the Contract, or assurances of
‐7-
INSTRUCTIONS
complete and prompt performance satisfactory to Owner have been received, Owner shall execute
all copies of the Contract and tender one copy to the successful Bidder at the Finalization. The
successful Bidder shall tender a copy to its surety company or companies.
16. Failure to Finalize
A. Annulment of Award: Liquidated Damaees. The failure or refusal of a successful
Bidder to comply with the conditions precedent to finalization or to properly finalize and execute
the Contract shall be just cause for the annulment of the award and the imposition of liquidated
damages or the exercise of equitable remedies, both as more specifically set forth in Section 8
above.
B. Subsequent Awards. On annulment of an award, Owner may accept, and award a
Contract based on, any other Bidder's Proposal as Owner, in its sole judgment, deems to be the
best or may invite new Proposals or may abandon the bidding process or the Work.
-8-
PROPOSAL
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROJECT
BID PACKAGE
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
Full Name of Bidder ("Bidder")
Principal Office Address
Local Office Address
Contact Person Telephone
TO: Village of Oak Brook ("Owner")
1200 Oak Brook Road
Oak Brook,lL 60523
Attention: Rania Serences, Senior Purchasing Assistant
Bidder warrants and represents that Bidder has carefully examined the Work Site described below
and its environs and has reviewed and understood all documents included, referred to, or
mentionedinthissetofdocuments,includingAddendaNos.-,whicharesecurely
stapled to the end of this Bidder's Proposal [if none, write "NONE"] ("Bid Package").
Bidder acknowledges and agrees that all terms capitalized in this Bidder's Proposal shall have the
meaning given to them in the documents included in the Bid Package'
1. Work Proposal
A. Contract and Work. If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder proposes, and agrees,
that Bidder will contract with Owner, in the form of the Contract included in the Bid Package:
(l) to provide, perform and complete at the site or sites described in the Bid Package ("Work Site")
and in the manner described and specified in the Bid Package all necessary work, labor, services,
transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste
disposal, information, data and other means and items necessary for the Fire Station 93 Bunk Room
Renovation Project which includes renovation of the existing bunk room and removal of existing
flooring materials in bunk room as indicated in the drawings and described herein. The general
contractor shall provide and install all materials, unless noted otherwise. Scope of work includes,
but not necessarily limited to, general interior demolition of existing walls and flooring, new metal
stud framing with gypsum wall board finish; wood trim, new electrical receptacles and fixtures,
modification of existing electrical can lights, ceiling patching, painting, and install of all new
casework including the legacy lockers, as well as finished wood bases, end panels,
-9‐
PROPOSAL
hardware and all accessories as shown on the drawings and described herein. Alternate Bid
includes providing and installing new carpeting in Fire Station 93 Bunk Room (demolition for this
work is part of the base bid), (2) to procure and furnish all permits, licenses and other governmental
approvals and authorizations necessary in connection therewith except as otherwise expressly
provided in Attachment A to the Contract included in the Bid Package; (3) to procure and furnish
all Bonds and all certificates and policies of insurance specified in the Bid Package; (4) to pay all
applicable federal, state and local taxes; (5) to do all other things required of Contractor by the
Contract; and (6) to provide, perform and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and
workmanlike manner and in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, the Contract;
all of which is herein referred to as the "Work."
B. Manner and Time of Performance. If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder
proposes, and agrees, that Bidder will perform the Work in the manner and time prescribed in the
Bid Package and according to the requirements of Owner pursuant thereto.
C. General. If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder proposes, and agrees, that
Bidder will do all other things required of Bidder or Contractor, as the case may be, by the Bid
Package.
2. Contract Price Proposal
If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder will, except as otherwise provided in
Section 2.1 of the Contract, take in full payment for all Work and other matters set forth under
Section I above, including overhead and profit; taxes, contributions, and premiums; and
compensation to all subcontractors and suppliers, the compensation set forth on the following
"schedule of Prices" ("Price Proposal"), which Schedule of Prices Bidder understands and agrees
will be made a part of the Contract:
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
A. LUMP SUM CONTRACT
l. Provide and install all materials needed for the renovation of the existing Fire Station
93 Bunk Room and demolition of existing flooring. For providing, performing, and
completing Work, the total Contract Price of :
$
In words
2. Alternate Bid:
Provide and install new carpeting in Bunk Room. Demolition for this work is part of
the base bid.
-1 0-
PROPOSAL
In words
B. BASIS FOR DETERMINING PRICES
lt is expressly understood and agreed that:
1. [DeletedJ
2. Owner is not subject to state or local sales, use and excise taxes and no such taxes are
included in this Schedule of Prices;
3. All other applicable federal, state, and local taxes of every kind and nature applicable to
the Work as well as all taxes, contributions, and premiums for unemployment insurance,
old age or retirement benefits, pensions, annuities, or other similar benefits are included in
this Schedule of Prices; and
4. All costs, royalties, and fees arising from the use on, or the incorporation into, the Work of
patented equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions
are included in this Schedule of Prices.
3. Contract Time Proposal
If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder will commence the Work not later than the
"Commencement Date" set forth in Attachment A to the Contract and will perform the Work
diligently and continuously and will complete the Work not later than the "Completion Date" set
forth in Attachment A to the Contract.
4. Firm Proposal
All prices and other terms stated in this Bidder's Proposal are firm and shall not be subject
to withdrawal, escalation, or change for a period of 60 days after the date on which any Bidder's
Proposal is opened or such extended acceptance date for Bidder's Proposals as may be established
pursuant to Sections 10 and 13 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
5. Bidder Representations
A. No Collusion. Bidder warrants and represents that the only persons, firms, or
corporations interested in this Bidder's Proposal as principals are those named in Bidder's Sworn
Acknowledgment attached hereto and that this Bidder's Proposal is made without collusion with
any other person, firm or corporation.
B. Not Barred. Bidder warrants, represents and certifies that it is not barred by law
from contracting with Owner or with any unit of state or local government.
-11-
PROPOSAL
C. Oualified. Bidder warrants and represents that Bidder has the requisite experience,
ability, capital, facilities, plant, organization and staff to enable Bidder to perform the Work
successfully and promptly and to conlmence and complete the Work within the Contract Price and
Contract Time Proposals set forth above. In support thereof, Bidder submits the attached Sworn
Work History Statement. In the event Bidder is preliminarily deemed to be one of the most
favorable to the interests of Owner, Bidder hereby agrees to furnish on request, within two business
days or such longer period as may be set forth in the request, such additional information as may
be necessary to satisfy Owner that Bidder is adequately prepared to fulfill the Contract.
D. Owner's Reliance. Bidder acknowledges that Owner is relying on all warranties,
representations and statements made by Bidder in this Bidder's Proposal.
6. Suretv and Insurance
Bidder herewith tenders surety and insurance commitment letters as specified in Section 6
of the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals.
7. Bid Securitv
Bidder herewith tenders a Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond as specified in
Section 6 of the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals for 5 percent of Bidder's Price Proposal (*Bid
Security").
8. Owner's Remedies
Bidder acknowledges and agrees that should Bidder fail to timely submit all additional
information that is requested of it; or should Bidder, if Owner awards Bidder the Contract, fail to
timely submit all the Bonds and all the certificates and policies of insurance required of it; or
should Bidder, if Owner awards Bidder the Contract, fail to timely execute the Contract,
Contractor's Certification and all other required documentation related to the Contract, it will be
difficult and impracticable to ascertain and determine the amount of damage that Owner will
sustain by reason of any such failure and, for such reason, Owner shall have the right, at its option
in the event of any such default by Bidder, to retain or recover as reasonably estimated liquidated
damages, and not as a penalty, the entire amount of the Bid Security or five percent of Bidder's
Price Proposal, whichever is greater, or to exercise any and all equitable remedies it may have
against Bidder.
9. Owner's Rishts
Bidder acknowledges and agrees that Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bidder's
Proposals, reserves the right to accept or reject any item of any Bidder's Proposal and reserves
such other rights as are set forth in Section l3 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
-12-
PROPOSAL
10. Bidder's Oblisations
In submitting this Bidder's Proposal, Bidder understands and agrees that it shall be bound
by each and every term, condition or provision contained in the Bid Package, which are by this
reference incorporated herein and made apart hereof.
DATED:
Bidder
2018
By:
Title:
A■est
By:
Title:
SEE GENERALINSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS,SECTION 7,
FOR SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS
-13-
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROECT
BID PACKAGE
BIDDER'SSWORN ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
("Deponenl"), being first duly sworn on oath,
deposes and states that the undersigned Bidder is organized as indicated below and that all
statements herein made are made on behalf of such Bidder in support of its Bidder's Proposal for
the above Contract and that Deponent is authorized to make them.
Deponent also deposes and states that Bidderhas carefullyprepared, reviewed and checked
its Bidder's Proposal and that the statements contained in its Bidder's Proposal and in this
Acknowledgement are true and correct.
COMPLETE APPLICABLE SECTION ONLY
1. Corporation
Bidder is a corporation that is organized and existing under the laws of the State of
that is qualified to do business in the State of Illinois, and that is operating under
the legal name of
The offlcers ofthe corporation are as fbllows:
TITLE NAME
President
ADDRESS
Vice President
Secretary
Treasurer
2. Partnership
Bidder is a partnership that is organized, existing and registered under the laws of the State
of-pursuanttothatcertainPartnershipAgreementdatedasof that
is qualifled to do business in the State of 11linois,and that is operating under the legal nalne of
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The general partners ofthe partnership are as fonows:
NAME ADDRESS
3. Individual
Biddcr is an individual as follows:
Full name:
Residence address:
Business address:
If operating under a trade or assumed
name that name is:
4. Joint Venture
Bidder is a joint venture that is organized and existing under the laws of the State of
pursuant to that certain Joint Venture Agteement dated as of ,that is
qualified to do business in the State of Illinois, and that is operating under the legal name of
The signatories to the aforesaid Joint Venture Agreement are as follows:
NAME (and ENTITY TYPE) ADDRESS
ロ
ロ
ロ
-2-
ACKNOWLEDGEPIENT
[For each signatory,indicate type of entity(CorpOration=``C'';Partncrship=``P'';and lndividual
=``I'')and prOvidc,on separate sheets,the infollllation required in Paragraph l,2,or 3 above,as
applicable]
DATED:20 .
Attest
By:
Title:
Subscribed and Sworn to before me on 20 .
Notary Public
My commission expires:
SEE GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS,SECTION 7,
FOR SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS
-3-
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M ttNOVATION PROJECT
BID PACKAGE
BIDDER'S SWORN WORK HISTORY STATEMENT
("Deponent"), being first duly sworn on
oath,deposes and states that all statellnents made in this Swom Work I‐Iistory Statellnent are made
on behalfofthe undcrsigned Bidderin support ofits Bidder's Proposal fbrthe above Contract and
that Dcponentis autho五 zed to make them.
Deponent also deposes and states that Bidder has careillly prepared,reviewcd and
checked this Sworn Work I‐Iistory Staternent and that thc statements contained in this Sworn Work
History Statelnent arc true and correct.
IF NECESSARY FOR FULL DISCLOSURE,ADD SEPARATE SⅡEETS
JOINT VENTURES MUST SUBMIT SEPARATE
SWORN WORK HISTORY STATEPIENTS FOR TⅡE JOINT VENTURE
AND FOR EACⅡ SIGNATORY TO THE JOINT VENTURE AGREEMENT
l. Nature of Business
State the nature of Bidder's business:
2. Composition of Work
During the past three years, Bidder's work has consisted of:
_% Federal
o/o Other Public
o/o As Contractor o% Bidder's Forces
Yo As Subcontractor % Subcontractors
%P五 vate %Materials
3. Years in Business
State the number of years that Bidder, under its current name and organization, has been
continuously engaged in the aforesaid business: _ years
WORK ⅡISTORY STATEMENT
4. Predecessor Or2anizations
lfBidder has been in business underits current name and organization for less than flve years,list
any predecessor organizations:
NAME ADDRESS YEARS
5. Business Licenses
List all business licenses currently held by Bidder:
ISSUING AGENCY TYPE NUMBER EXPIRATION
6. Related Experience
Listthree ppjects most comparable to the Work completed by Bidder,or its predecessors,
in the past flve years:
PROJECT ONE PROJECT TWO PROJECT THREE
OwnerName
Owner Address
Reference
Telephone Number
Type of Work
-2-
WORK ⅡISTORY STATEMENT
PROJECT ONE PROJECT TWO PROJECT TⅡREE
Contractor
(If Bidder was)
(Subcontractor)
Amount ofContract
Date Completed
DATED:20 。
Biddcr
By:
Title:
Subscribed and Sworn to before me on
Notary Public
My commission expires:
Attest
By:
Title:
20 .
SEE GENERALINSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS,SECTION 7,
FOR SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS
-3-
TO:
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROJECT
BID PACKAGE
NOTICE OF AWARD
FROM: Village of Oak Brook
("Contractor")
On
("Owner")
20-, Owner found to be most favorable to the interests of Owner
the Bidder's Proposal submitted by Contractor and dated .,20-, in which
Contractor proposes to contract with Owner, in the form of the Contract included in the Bid
Package to perform the following Work: (l) to provide, perform and complete at the Work Site
and in the manner described and specified in the Bid Package all necessary work, labor, services,
transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste
disposal, information, data and other means and items necessary for Fire Station 93 Bunk Room
Renovation Project which includes renovation of the existing bunk room and removal of existing
flooring materials in bunk room as indicated in the drawings and described herein. The general
contractor shall provide and install all materials, unless noted otherwise. Scope of work includes,
but not necessarily limited to, general interior demolition of existing walls and flooring, new metal
stud framing with gypsum wall board finish; wood trim, new electrical receptacles and fixtures,
modification of existing electrical can lights, ceiling patching, painting, and install of all new
casework including the legacy lockers, as well as finished wood bases, end panels, hardware and
all accessories as shown on the drawings and described herein. Alternate Bid includes providing
and installing new carpeting in Fire Station 93 Bunk Room (demolition for this work is part of the
base bid), (2) to procure and fumish all permits, Iicenses and other governmental approvals and
authorizations necessary in connection therewith except as otherwise expressly provided in
Attachment A to the Contract included in the Bid Package; (3) to procure and furnish all Bonds
and all certificates and policies of insurance specified in the Bid Package; (4) to pay all applicable
federal, state and local taxes; (5) to do all other things required of the Contractor by the Contract;
and (6) to provide, perform and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner
and in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, the Contract.
OWNER ACCORDINGLY AWARDS CONTRACTOR, EFFECTIVE AS OF THE DATE
OF DELIVERY OF THIS NOTICE OF AWARD, THE CONTRACT FOR SAID WORK
FOR THE LUMP SUM AND/OR UNIT PRICES, AS THE CASE MAY BE, SET FORTH
IN THE BIDDER'S PROPOSAL.
The Contract will be finalized and executed on
NOTICE OF AWARD
20-, at the above listed
office of Owner. The Contract will be executed by Owner provided that all conditions precedent
to finalization have been satisfied. Contractor must have complied with all conditions precedent
to finalization set forth in Section 15 of the General Instructions to Bidders included in the Bid
Package, on or before this date.
The failure or refusal to comply with the conditions precedent to finalization on or before the
Finalization Date or to execute the Contract on the Finalization Date shall result, at Owner's
option, in the imposition of liquidated damages and the annulment of this award, or in Owner's
exercise of any or all equitable remedies Owner may have, all as more specifically set forth in
Sections 8, 15, and l6 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
DATED:
Village of Oak Brook
Name
Title
#34920191 v2
20
By:
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
CONTRACT FOR FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M
RENOVATION PROECT
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
CONTRACT FOR FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M
RENOVAT10N PROECT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE I: TIIE WORK ............1
1.1 Performance of the Work ...................1
1.2 Commencement and Completion Dates ...............2
1.3 Required Submittals .........2
A. Submittals Required .........2
B. Number and Format ..........2
C. Time of Submission and Owner's Review. ..........2
D. Responsibility for De1ay........ .............3
1.4 Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisions .................3
1.5 Conditions at the Work Site; Record Drawings .....................3
1.6 Technical Ability to Perform .........,....4
1.7 Financial Ability to Perform ...............4
1.8 Time......... .......4
1.9 Safety at the Work Site........... ............4
1.10 Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs... .......5
1.1 1 Damage to the Work, the Work Site, and Other Property.... .................... 5
l.l2 Subcontractors and Suppliers .............5
A. Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Suppliers............. ....................5
B. Removal of Subcontractors and Suppliers............ .................6
l.l3 Simultaneous Work By Others. ..........6
l.l4 Occupancy Prior to Final Payment............. ..........6
1.15 Owner's Right to Terminate or Suspend Work for Convenience .............................. 6
A. Termination or Suspension for Convenience ............. ............6
B. Payment for Completed Work.. ..........6
ARTICLE II: CHANGES AND DELAYS. ......................7
2.1 Changes ..........7
2.2 Delays .............7
A. Extensions for Unavoidable Delays .....................7
B. No Compensation for Delays .............7
ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY F'OR DEFECTIVE WORK .......7
3.1 Inspection; Testing; Correction of Defects. ..........7
A. lnspection .......7
B. Re-Inspection............ ........7
C. Correction .......8
3.2 Warranty of Work.... .........8
A. Scope of Warranty............... ...............8
B. Repairs; Extension of Warranty............... ............8
C. Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties ................8
3.3 Owner's Right to Correct ...................8
ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES.......... ........8
4.1 Bonds ..............8
4.2 Insurance.. .......9
4.3 Indemnification.......... .......9
ARTICLE V: PAYMENT ......... ......................9
5.1 Contract Price......... ..........9
5.2 Taxes and Benefits.............. ...............9
5.3 Progress Payments.. ..........9
A. Payment in Installments .......... ...........9
B. Pay Requests............. ......10
C. Work Entire ....................10
5.4 Final Acceptance and Final Payment............ .....10
A. Notice of Completion............ ...........10
B. Punch List and Final Acceptance........ ...............10
C. Final Payment............ .....10
5.5 Liens .............11
A. Tit1e.......... ..... 11
B. Waivers of Lien ..............1I
C. Removal of Liens ...........11
D. Protection of Owner On1y......... .......11
-11-
5.6 Deductions ......................1I
A. Owner's Right to Withhold............... .................1I
B. Use of Withheld Funds.. ...................12
ARTICLE VI: DISPUTES AND REMEDIES................ .................12
6.1 Dispute Resolution Procedure ..........12
A. Notice of Disputes and Objections........... ..........12
B. Negotiation of Disputes and Objections........... ....................12
6.2 Contractor's Remedies ............... ......12
6.3 Owner's Remedies.. ........13
6.4 Owner's Additional Remedy for Delay.. ............14
6.5 Terminations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience.......... ...........14
ARTICLE VII: LEGAL RELATIONSHIPS AND REQUIREMENTS...........................14
7.1 Binding Effect ...j.............. ................14
7.2 Relationship of the Parties....... .........14
7.3 No Collusion/Prohibited Interests ......................15
7.4 Assignment................ ..... 15
7.5 Confidential Information............. .....15
7.6 No Waiver ......................15
7.7 No Third Party Beneficiaries..... .......16
7.8 Notices..... ..... 16
7.9 Governing Laws ........ .....16
7.10 Changes in Laws..... ........17
7.ll Compliance with Laws......... ............17
A. Compliance Required .....17
B. Liability for Fines, Penalties... ..........17
C. Prevailing Wage Act............ .............17
D. Required Provisions Deemed Inserted ...............18
7.12 Compliance with Patents ..................18
A. Assumption of Costs, Royalties, and Fees .........18
B. Effect of Contractor Being Enjoined... ...............18
7.13 Time......... .....18
7 .14 Severability............... ...... 18
7.15 Entire Agreement ............18
7.16 Amendments............... ...................... 19
Contractor's Certification
Attachment A: Supplemental Schedule of Conkact Terms
Attachment B: Specifications
Attachment C: List of Drawings
Attachment D: Special Project Requirements
Appendix L: Prevailing Wages
Appendix 2: Form of Performance Bond
Appendix 3: Form of Labor and Materials Bond
-lV―
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
CONTRACT FOR FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATIONPROЛCT
In consideration of the mutual promises set forth below, the Village of Oak Brook, 1200
Oak Brook Road, Oak Brookr lllinefu, 60523ran Illinois municipal corporation ("Owner"), and
a Corporati on ("Contractor"), make this Contract as of
Date") and hereby agree as follows:
,2018,(the``聯 C′Jν θ
ARTICLE I: THE WORK
l.l Performance ofthe Work
Contractor,at its solc cost and expense,must provide,perfo.111,and complete all of thc
following,all ofwhich is herein referrcd to as the``″br″':
1.Labor. Equipment. Materials. and Supplies. Provide, perform, and complete, in the
manner described and specified in this Contract, all necessary work, labor, services,
transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas,
electric, water, waste disposal, information, data, and other means and items
necessary to accomplish the Project at the Work Site, both as defined in
Attachment A, in accordance with the specifications attached hereto as
Attachment B, the drawings identified in the list attached hereto as Attachment C,
and the Special Project Requirements attached hereto as Attachment D.
Permits. Except as otherwise provided in Attachment A, procure and furnish all
permits, licenses, and other govemmental approvals and authorizations necessary
in connection therewith.
Bonds and Insurance. Procure and furnish all Bonds and all certificates of
insurance specified in this Contract.
Taxes. Pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes.
Miscellaneous. Do all other things required of Contractor by this Contract,
including without limitation arranging for utility and other services needed for the
Work and for testing, including the installation of temporary utility lines, wiring,
switches, fixtures, hoses, connections, and meters, and providing sufficient sanitary
conveniences and shelters to accommodate all workers and all personnel of Owner
engaged in the Work.
2.
3.
CONTRACT
6. Ouality. Provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and
workmanlike manner, consistent with the highest standards of professional and
construction practices and in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant
to, this Contract, and with the greatest economy, efficiency, and expedition
consistent therewith, with only new, undamaged and first quality equipment,
materials, and supplies.
1.2 Commencement and Completion Dates
Contractor must commence the Work not later than the "Commencement Date" set forth
on Attachment A and must diligently and continuously prosecute the Work at such a rate as will
allow the Work to be fully provided, performed, and completed in full compliance with this
Contract not later than the "Completion Date" set forth in Attachment A. The time of
commencement, rate of progress, and time of completion are referred to in this Contract as the
"Contract Time."
1.3 Required Submittals
A. Submittals Required. Contractor must submit to Owner all documents, data, and
information specifically required to be submitted by Contractor under this Contract and must, in
addition, submit to Owner all such drawings, specifications, descriptive information, and
engineering documents, data, and information as may be required, or as may be requested by
Owner, to show the details of the Work, including a complete description of all equipment,
materials, and supplies to be provided under this Contract ("Required Submittals"). Such details
must include, but are not limited to, design data, structural and operating features, principal
dimensions, space required or provided, clearances required or provided, type and brand of finish,
and all similar matters, for all components of the Work.
B. Number and Format. Contractor must provide three complete sets for each
Required Submittal. All Required Submittals must be prepared on white 8-ll2"xl1" paper.
C. Time of Submission and Owner's Review. All Required Submittals must be
provided to Owner no later than the time, if any, specified in this Contract for their submission or,
if no time for submission is specified, in sufficient time, in Owner's sole opinion, to permit Owner
to review the same prior to the commencement of the part of the Work to which they relate and
prior to the purchase of any equipment, materials, or supplies that they describe. Owner will have
the right to require such corrections as may be necessary to make such submittals conform to this
Contract. All such submittals will, after final processing and review with no exception noted by
Owner, become apart of this Contract. No Work related to any submittal may be performed by
Contractor until Owner has completed review of such submittal with no exception noted. Owner's
review and stamping of any Required Submittal will be for the sole purpose of examining the
general management, design, and details of the proposed Work, does not relieve Contractor of the
entire responsibility for the performance of the Work in full compliance with, and as required by
or pursuant to this Contract, and may not be regarded as any assumption of risk or liability by
Owner.
‐2‐
CONTRACT
D. Resoonsibility for Dela)r. Contractor is responsible for any delay in the Work due
to delay in providing Required Submittals conforming to this Contract.
1.4 Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisions
Contractor represents and warrants that it has carefully reviewed this Contract, including
all of its Attachments, and the drawings identified in Attachment C, all of which are by this
reference incorporated into and made apart of this Contract. Contractor must, at no increase in
the Contract Price, provide workmanship, equipment, materials, and supplies that fully conform
to this Contract. Whenever any equipment, materials or supplies are specified or described in this
Contract by using the name or other identifying feature of a proprietary product or the name or
other identifring feature of a particular manufacturer or vendor, the specific item mentioned is
understood as establishing the type, function and quality desired. Other manufacturers' or
vendors' products may be accepted, provided that the products proposed are equivalent in
substance and function to those named as determined by Owner in its sole and absolute discretion.
Contractor must promptly notify Owner of any discrepancy, etror, omission, ambiguity, or
conflict among any of the provisions of this Contract before proceeding with any Work affected
thereby. If Contractor fails to give such notice to Owner, then the subsequent decision of Owner
as to which provision of this Contract governs is final, and any corrective work required does not
entitle Contractor to any damages, to any compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or to any
delay or extension of the Contract Time.
When the equipment, materials, or supplies furnished by Contractor cannot be installed as
specified in this Contract, Contractor must, without any increase in the Contract Price, make all
modifications required to properly install the equipment, materials, or supplies. Any such
modification is subject to the prior review and consent of Owner.
1.5 Conditions at the Work Sitet Record Drawinss
Contractor represents and warrants that it has had a sufficient opportunity to conduct a
thorough investigation of the Work Site and the surrounding area and has completed such
investigation to its satisfaction. Contractor will have no claim for damages, for compensation in
excess ofthe Contract Price, or for a delay or extension ofthe Contract Time based upon conditions
found at, or in the vicinity of, the Work Site. When information pertaining to subsurface,
underground or other concealed conditions, soils analysis, borings, test pits, utility locations or
conditions, buried structures, condition of existing structures, and other investigations is or has
been provided by Owner, or is or has been otherwise made available to Contractor by Owner, such
information is or has been provided or made available solely for the convenience of Contractor
and is not part of this Contract. Owner assumes no responsibility whatever in respect to the
sufficiency or accuracy of such information, and there is no guaranty or warranty, either expressed
or implied, that the conditions indicated are representative of those existing throughout the Work
or the Work Site, or that the conditions indicated are representative of those existing at any
particular location, or that the conditions indicated may not change, or that unanticipated
conditions may not be present.
CONTRACT
Contractor is solely responsible for locating all existing underground installations by
prospecting no later than two workdays prior to any scheduled excavation or trenching, whichever
is earlier. Contractor must check all dimensions, elevations, and quantities indicated in this
Contract within the same time period as set forth above for prospecting underground installations.
Contractor must lay out the Work in accordance with this Contract and must establish and maintain
such locations, lines and levels. Wherever pre-existing work is encountered, Contractor must
verify and be responsible for dimensions and location of such pre-existing work. Contractor must
notifu Owner of any discrepancy between the dimensions, elevations and quantities indicated in
this Contract and the conditions of the Work Site or any other errors, omissions or discrepancies
which Contract may discover during such inspections. Full instructions will be furnished by
Owner should such error, omission, or discrepancy be discovered, and Contractor must carry out
such instructions as if originally specified and without any increase in Contract Price.
Before Final Acceptance of the Work, Contractor must submit to Owner two sets of
Drawings of Record, unless a greater number is specified elsewhere in this Contract, indicating all
field deviations from Attachment B or the drawings identified in Attachment C.
1.6 Technical Abilitv to Perform
Contractor represents and warrants that it is sufficiently experienced and competent, and
has the necessary capital, facilities, plant, organization, and staff, to provide, perform and complete
the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract.
1.7 Financial Abilitv to Perform
Contractor represents and warrants that it is financially solvent, and Contractor has the
financial resources necessary to provide, perform and complete the Work in full compliance with,
and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract.
Tillle
Contractor represents and warrants that it is ready, willing, able and prepared to begin the
Work on the Commencement Date and that the Contract Time is sufficient time to permit
completion of the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract
for the Contract Price, all with due regard to all natural and man-made conditions that may affect
the Work or the Work Site and all difficulties, hindrances, and delays that may be incident to the
Work.
1.9 Safetv at the Work Site
Contractor is solely and completely responsible for providing and maintaining safe
conditions at the Work Site, including the safety of all persons and property during performance
of the Work. This requirement applies continuously and is not limited to normal working hours.
Contractor must take all safety precautions as necessary to comply with all applicable laws and to
prevent injury to persons and damage to property.
1.8
‐4-
CONTRACT
Contractor must conduct all of its operations without intemrption or interference with
vehicular and pedestrian traffic on public and private rights-of-way, unless it has obtained permits
therefor from the proper authorities. If any public or private right-of-way are rendered unsafe by
Contractor's operations, Contractor must make such repairs or provide such temporary ways or
guards as are acceptable to the proper authorities.
1.10 Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs
Contractor must keep the Work Site and adjacent areas clean at all times during
performance of the Work and must, upon completion of the Work, leave the Work Site and
adjacent areas in a clean and orderly condition.
1.11 Damage to the Work. the Work Site. and Other Property
The Work and everything pertaining thereto is provided, performed, completed, and
maintained at the sole risk and cost of Contractor from the Commencement Date until Final
Payment. Contractor is fully responsible for the protection of all public and private property and
all persons. Without limiting the foregoing, Contractor must, at its own cost and expense, provide
all permanent and temporary shoring, anchoring and bracing required by the nature of the Work
in order to make all parts absolutely stable and rigid, even when such shoring, anchoring and
bracing is not explicitly specified, and support and protect all buildings, bridges, roadways,
conduits, wires, water pipes, gas pipes, sewers, pavements, curbs, sidewalks, fixtures and
landscaping of all kinds and all other public or private property that may be encountered or
endangered in providing, performing and completing the Work. Contractor will have no claim
against Owner because of any damage or loss to the Work or to Contractor's equipment, materials,
or supplies from any cause whatsoever, including damage or loss due to simultaneous work by
others. Contractor must, promptly and without charge to Owner, repair or replace, to the
satisfaction of Owner, any damage done to, and any loss suffered by, the Work and any damage
done to, and any loss suffered by, the Work Site or other property as a result of the Work.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, Contractor's obligations under this Section
exist without regard to, and may not be construed to be waived by, the availability or unavailability
of any insurance, either of Owner or Contractor, to indemnify, hold harmless, or reimburse
Contractor for the cost of any repair or replacement work required by this Section.
l.l2 Subcontractors and Suppliers
A. Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Suppliers. Contractor must perform the
Work with its own personnel and under the management, supervision, and control of its own
organization unless otherwise approved by Owner in writing. All subcontractors, suppliers, and
subcontracts used by Contractor must be acceptable to, and approved in advance by, Owner.
Owner's approval of any subcontractor, supplier, and subcontract does not relieve Contractor of
full responsibility and liability for the provision, performance, and completion of the Work in full
compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. All Work performed under any
subcontract is subject to all of the provisions of this Contract in the same manner as if performed
by employees of Contractor. Every reference in this Contract to "Contractor" is deemed also to
‐5-
CONTRACT
refer to all subcontractors and suppliers of Contractor. Every subcontract must include a provision
binding the subcontractor or supplier to all provisions of this Contract.
B. Removal of Subcontractors and Suppliers. If any subcontractor or supplier fails to
perform the part of the Work undertaken by it in a manner satisfactory to Owner, Contractor must
immediately upon notice from Owner terminate such subcontractor or supplier. Contractor will
have no claim for damages, for compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or for a delay or
extension of the Contract Time as a result of any such termination.
1.13 Simultaneous Work Bv Others
Owner has the right to perform or have performed such other work as Owner may desire
in, about, or near the Work Site during the performance of the Work by Contractor. Contractor
must make every reasonable effort to perform the Work in such manner as to enable both the Work
and such other work to be completed without hindrance or interference from each other.
Contractor must afford Owner and other contractors reasonable opportunity for the execution of
such other work and must properly coordinate the Work with such other work.
l.l4 Occupancv Prior to Final Pavment
Owner will have the right, at its election, to occupy, use, or place in service any part of the
Work prior to Final Payment. Such occupancy, use, or placement in service must be conducted in
such manner as not to damage any of the Work or to unreasonably interfere with the progress of
the Work. No such occupancy, use, or placement in service may be construed as an acceptance of
any of the Work or a release or satisfaction of Contractor's duty to insure and protect the Work,
noi *uy it, unless conducted in an unreasonable manner, be considered as an interference with
Contractor's provision, performance, or completion of the Work.
1.15 Owner's Right to Terminate or Suspend Work for Convenience
A. Termination or Suspension for Convenience. Owner has the right, for its
convenience, to terminate or suspend the Work in whole or in part at any time by written notice to
Contractor. Every such notice must state the extent and effective date of such termination or
suspension. On such effective date, Contractor must, as and to the extent directed, stop Work
urrde. this Contract, cease all placement of further orders or subcontracts, terminate or suspend
Work under existing orders and subcontracts, cancel any outstanding orders or subcontracts that
may be cancelled, and take any action necessary to protect any property in its possession in which
Owner has or may acquire any interest and to dispose of such property in such manner as may be
directed by Owner.
B. Pavment for Completed Work. In the event of any termination pursuant to
Subsection 1 . 1 5A above, Owner must pay Contractor ( I ) such direct costs, excluding overhead, as
Contractor has paid or incurred for all Work done in compliance with, and as required by or
pursuant to, this Contract up to the effective date of termination together with ten percent of such
costs for overhead and profit; and (2) such other costs pertaining to the Work, exclusive of
overhead and profit, as Contractor may have reasonably and necessarily incurred as the result of
-6-
CONTRACT
such termination. Any such payment may be offset by any prior payment or payments and is
subject to Owner's rights to withhold and deduct as provided in this Contract.
ARTICLE II: CHANGES AND DELAYS
2.1 Changes
Owner has the right, by written order executed by Owner, to make changes in the Contract,
the Work, the Work Site, and the Contract Time ("Change Ordef'). lf any Change Order causes
an increase or decrease in the amount of the Work, an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price
or Contract Time may be made. All claims by Contractor for an equitable adjustment in either the
Contract Price or the Contract Time must be made within two business days following receipt of
such Change Order, and may, if not made prior to such time, be conclusively deemed to have been
waived. No decrease in the amount of the Work caused by any Change Order will entitle
Contractor to make any claim for damages, anticipated profits, or other compensation.
2.2 Delavs
A. Extensions for Unavoidable Delays. For any delay that may result from causes that
could not be avoided or controlled by Contractor, Contractor must, upon timely written
application, be entitled to issuance of a Change Order providing for an extension of the Contract
Time for a period of time equal to the delay resulting from such unavoidable cause. No extension
of the Contract Time will be allowed for any other delay in completion of the Work.
B. No Compensation for Delays. No payment, compensation, damages, or adjustment
of any kind, other than the extension of the Contract Time provided in Subsection 2.2A above,
may be made to, or claimed by, Contractor because of hindrances or delays from any cause in the
cofilmencement, prosecution, or completion of the Work, whether caused by Owner or any other
party and whether avoidable or unavoidable.
ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR
DEFECTIVE WORI(
3.1 Inspection: Testing: Correction of Defects
A. Inspection. Until Final Payment, all parts of the Work are subject to inspection and
testing by Owner or its designated representatives. Contractor must furnish, at its own expense,
all reasonable access, assistance, and facilities required by Owner for such inspection and testing.
B. Re-Inspection. Re-inspection and re-testing of any Work may be ordered by Owner
at any time, and, if so ordered, any covered or closed Work must be uncovered or opened by
Contractor. If the Work is found to be in full compliance with this Contract, then Ownermust pay
the cost of uncovering, opening, re-inspecting, or re-testing, as the case may be. If such Work is
not in fuIl compliance with this Contract, then Contractor must pay such cost.
-7‐
CONTRACT
C. Correction. Until Final Payment, Contractor must, promptly and without charge,
repair, correct, or replace all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, or
unsuitable or that in any way fails to conform strictly to the requirements of this Contract.
3.2 Warrantv of Work
A. Scope of Warrantv. Contractor warrants that the Work and all of its components
will be free from defects and flaws in design, workmanship, and materials; must strictly conform
to the requirements of this Contract; and will be fit, sufficient, and suitable for the purposes
expressed in, or reasonably inferred from, this Contract. The warranty herein expressed is in
addition to any other warranties expressed in this Contract, or expressed or implied by law, which
are hereby reserved unto Owner.
B. Repairs: Extension of Warranty. Contractor, promptly and without charge, must
correct any failure to fulfill the above warranty that may be discovered or develop at any time
within one year after Final Payment or such longer period as may be prescribed in Attachment B
or Attachment D to this Contract or by law. The above warranty may be extended automatically
to cover all repaired and replacement parts and labor provided or performed under such warranty
and Contractor's obligation to correct Work may be extended for a period of one year from the
date of such repair or replacement. The time period established in this Subsection 3.2B relates
only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct Work and may not be construed to establish
a period of limitation with respect to other obligations that Contractor has under this Contract.
C. Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties. Whenever Attachment B or Attachment D
requires a subcontractor or supplier to provide a guaranty or warranty, Contractor is solely
responsible for obtaining said guaranty or warranty in form satisfactory to Owner and assigning
said warranty or guaranty to Owner. Acceptance of any assigned warranties or guaranties by
Owner is a precondition to Final Pa5rment and does not relieve Contractor of any of its guaranty
or warranty obligations under this Contract.
3.3 Owner's Rieht to Correct
If, within two business days after Owner gives Contractor notice of any defect, damage,
flaw, unsuitability, nonconformity, or failure to meet warranty subject to correction by Contractor
pursuant to Section 3.1 or Section 3.2 of this Contract, Contractor neglects to make, or undertake
with due diligence to make, the necessary corrections, then Owner is entitled to make, either with
its own forces or with contract forces, the corrections and to recover from Contractor all resulting
costs, expenses, losses, or damages, including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses.
ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES
Bonds
Contemporaneous with Contractor's execution of this Contract, Contractor must provide a
Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond, on forms provided by, or otherwise
acceptable to, Owner, from a surety company licensed to do business in the State of Illinois with
4。1
CONTRACT
a general rating of A and a financial size category of Class X or better in Best's lnsurance Guide,
each in the penal sum of the Contract Pice ("Bonds"). Contractor, at all times while providing,
performing, or completing the Work, including, without limitation, at all times while correcting
any failure to meet waranty pursuant to Section 3.2 of this Contract, must maintain and keep in
force, at Contractor's expense, the Bonds required hereunder.
4.2 Insurance
Contractor hereby agrees and will, at its expense, carry insurance pursuant to the terms,
conditions, and coverages set forth in Attachment A.
4.3 Indemnification
Contractor hereby agrees to and will indemnify and save harmless Owner and all of it
elected officials, officers, employees, attomeys, agents, and representatives against any and all
lawsuits, claims, demands, damages,liabilities,losses, and expenses, including attorneys' fees and
administrative expenses, that may arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with
Contractor's performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereof, whether or not
due or claimed to be due in whole or in part to the active, passive, or concurrent negligence or fault
of Contractor, except to the extent caused solely by the negligence of Owner.
ARTICLE V: PAYMENT
5.1 Contract Price
Owner must pay to Contractor, in accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions
set forth in this Article V and Attachment A, and Contractor must accept in full satisfaction for
providing, performing, and completing the Work, the amount or amounts set forth in Attachment A
(the"Contract Price"), subject to any additions, deductions, or withholdings provided for in this
Contract.
5.2 Taxes and Benefits
Owner is exempt from and will not be responsible to pay, or reimburse Contractor for, any
state or local sales, use, or excise taxes. The Contract Price includes all other applicable federal,
state, and local taxes of every kind and nature applicable to the Work as well as all taxes,
contributions, and premiums for unemployment insurance, old age or retirement benefits,
pensions, annuities, or other similar benefits. All claim or right to claim additional compensation
by reason of the payment of any such tax, contribution, or premium is hereby waived and released
by Contractor.
5.3 Progress PaYments
A. Payment in Installments. The Contract Price must be paid in monthly installments
in the manner set forth in Attachment A,("Progress Payments").
‐9‐
CONTRACT
B. Pay Requests. The Village of Oak Brook authorizes the payment of invoices on
the second and fourth Tuesday of the month. For consideration on one of these dates, payment
request must be received no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the second or fourth Tuesday of
the month. Each Pay Request must include (a) Contractor's certification of the value of, and partial
or final waivers of lien covering, all Work for which payment is then requested and
(b) Contractor's certification that all prior Progress Payments have been properly applied to the
payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were paid.
C. Work Entire. This Contract and the Work are entire and the Work as a whole is of
the essence of this Contract. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, each and every
part of this Contract and of the Work are interdependent and common to one another and to
bwner's obligation to pay all or any part of the Contract Price or any other consideration for the
Work. Any and all Progress Payments made pursuant to this Article are provided merely for the
convenience of Contractor and for no other purpose.
5.4 Final Acceptance and Final Pavment
A. Notice of Completion. When the Work has been completed and is ready in all
respects for acceptance by Owner, Contractor must notif,i Owner and request a final inspection
("Notice of Completion"). Contractor's Notice of Completion must be given sufficiently in
advance of the Completion Date to allow for scheduling of the final inspection and for completion
or correction before the Completion Date of any items identified by such inspection as being
defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or otherwise not in full
compliance with, or as required by or pursuant to, this Contract ("Punch List WorE').
B. Punch List and Final Acceptance. The Work may be finally accepted when, and
only when, the whole and all parts thereof have been completed to the satisfaction of Owner in full
compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. Upon receipt of Contractor's
Notice of Completion, Owner must make a review of the Work and notiff Contractor in writing
of all Punch List Work, if any, to be completed or corrected. Following Contractor's completion
or correction of all Punch List Work, Owner must make another review of the Work and prepare
and deliver to Contractor either a written notice of additional Punch List Work to be completed or
corrected or a written notice of final acceptance of the Work ("Final Acceptance").
C. Final Payment. As soon as practicable after Final Acceptance, Contractor must
submit to Owner a properly completed final Pay Request in the form provided by Owner ("Final
pay Requesf"). Ownei must pay to Contractor the balance of the Contract Price, after deducting
therefrom all charges against bontractor as provided for in this Contract("Final Payment"). Final
payment must be made not later than 60 days after Owner approves the Final Pay Request. The
acceptance by Contractor of Final Payment will operate as a fuIl and complete release of Owner
of and from any and all lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and expenses of,
by, or to Contractor for anything done, furnished for, arising out of, relating to, or in connection
with the Work or for o. on u""ornt of any act or neglect of Owner arising out of, relating to, or in
connection with the Work.
-10-
CONTRACT
5.5 Liens
A. Title. Nothing in this Contract may be construed as vesting in Contractor any right
of property in any equipment, materials, supplies, and other items provided under this Contract
after they have been installed in, incorporated into, attached to, or affixed to, the Work or the Work
Site. All such equipment, materials, supplies, and other items will, upon being so installed,
incorporated, attached or affixed, become the property of Owner, but such title will not release
Contractor from its duty to insure and protect the Work in accordance with the requirernents of
this Contract.
B. Waivers of Lien. Contractor must, from time to time at Owner's request and in any
event prior to Final Payment, fumish to Owner such receipts, releases, affidavits, certificates, and
other evidence as may be necessary to establish, to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner, that no
lien against the Work or the public funds held by Owner exists in favor of any person whatsoever
for or by reason of any equipment, material, supplies, or other item furnished, labor performed, or
other thing done in connection with the Work or this Contract ("Lien") and that no right to file any
Lien exists in favor of any person whatsoever.
C. Removal of Liens. If at any time any notice of any Lien is filed, then Contractor
must, promptly and without charge, discharge, remove, or otherwise dispose of such Lien. Until
such discharge, removal, or disposition, Owner will have the right to retain from any money
payable hereunder an amount that Owner, in its sole judgment, deems necessary to satisff such
Lien and to pay the costs and expenses, including attomeys' fees and administrative expenses, of
any actions brought in connection therewith or by reason thereof.
D. Protection of Owner Only. This Section does not operate to relieve Contractor's
surety or sureties from any of their obligations under the Bonds, nor may it be deemed to vest any
right, interest, or entitlement in any subcontractor or supplier. Owner's retention of funds pursuant
to this Section is deemed solely for the protection of its own interests pending removal of such
Liens by Contractor, and Owner will have no obligation to apply such funds to such removal but
may, nevertheless, do so where Owner's interests would thereby be served.
5.6 Deductions
A. Owner's Rieht to Withhold. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract
and without prejudice to any of Owner's other rights or remedies, Owner will have the right at any
time or times, whether before or after approval of any Pay Request, to deduct and withhold from
any Progress or Final Payment that may be or become due under this Contract such amount as may
reasonably appear necessary to compensate Owner for any actual or prospective loss due to:
(l) Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete;
(2) damage for which Contractor is liable under this Contract; (3) state or local sales, use, or excise
taxes from which Owner is exempt; (4) Liens or claims of Lien regardless of merit; (5) claims of
subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons regardless of merit; (6) delay in the progress or
completion of the Work; (7) inability of Contractor to complete the Work; (8) failure of Contractor
to properly complete or document any Pay Request; (9) any other failure of Contractor to perform
any of its obligations under this Contract; or (10) the cost to Owner, including attorneys' fees and
‐11-
CONTRACT
administrative costs, of correcting any of the aforesaid matters or exercising any one or more of
Owner's remedies set forth in Section 6.3 of this Contract.
B. Use of Withheld Funds. Owner is entitled to retain any and all amounts withheld
pursuant to Subsection 5.64, above until Contractor has either performed the obligations in
question or furnished security for such performance satisfactory to Owner. Owner is entitled to
apply any money withheld or any other money due Contractor under this Contract to reimburse
itself for any and all costs, expenses, losses, damages, liabilities, suits, judgments, awards,
attorneys' fees and administrative expenses incurred, suffered, or sustained by Owner and
chargeable to Contractor under this Contract.
ARTICLE VI: DISPUTES AND REMEDIES
6.1 Dispute Resolution Procedure
A. Notice of Disputes and Objections. If Contractor disputes or objects to any
requirement, direction, instruction, interpretation, determination, or decision of Owner, Contractor
may notify Owner in writing of its dispute or objection and of the amount of any equitable
adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time to which Contractor claims it will be entitled as
a result thereof; provided, however, that Contractor must, nevertheless, proceed without delay to
perform the Work as required, directed, instructed, interpreted, determined, or decided by Owner,
without regard to such dispute or objection. Unless Contractor so notifies Owner within two
business days after receipt of such requirement, direction, instruction, interpretation,
determination, or decision, Contractor is conclusively deemed to have waived all such disputes or
objections and all claims based thereon.
B. Nesotiation of Disputes and Objections. To avoid and settle without litigation any
such dispute or objection, Owner and Contractor agree to engage in good faith negotiations.
Within three business days after Owner's receipt of Contractor's written notice of dispute or
objection, a conference between Owner and Contractor will be held to resolve the dispute. Within
three business days after the end of the conference, Owner must render its final decision, in writing,
to Contractor. If Contractor objects to the final decision of Owner, then it must, within three
business days, give Owner notice thereof and, in such notice, must state its final demand for
settlement of the dispute. Unless Contractor so notifies Owner, Contractor will be conclusively
deemed (l) to have agreed to and accepted Owner's final decision and (2) to have waived all
claims based on such final decision.
6.2 Contractor's Remedies
If Owner fails or refuses to satisfu a final demand made by Contractor pursuant to
Section 6.1 of this Contract, or to otherwise resolve the dispute which is the subject of such demand
to the satisfaction of Contractor, within 10 days after receipt of such demand, then Contractor will
be entitled to pursue such remedies, not inconsistent with the provisions of this Contract, as it may
have in law or equity.
-12-
CONTRACT
6.3 Owner's Remedies
If it should appear at any time prior to Final Payment that Contractor has failed or refused
to prosecute, or has delayed in the prosecution of, the Work with diligence at a rate that assures
completion of the Work in full compliance with the requirements of this Contract on or before the
Completion Date, or has attempted to assign this Contract or Contractor's rights under this
Contract, either in whole or in part, or has falsely made any representation or warranty in this
Contract, or has otherwise failed, refused, or delayed to perform or satisfy any other requirement
of this Contract or has failed to pay its debts as they come d:ue ("Event of Defaulr"), and has failed
to cure any such Event of Default within five business days after Contractor's receipt of written
notice of such Event of Default, then Owner will have the right, at its election and without
prejudice to any other remedies provided by law or equity, to pursue any one or more of the
following remedies:
1. Owner may require Contractor, within such reasonable time as may be fixed by
Owner, to complete or correct all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged,
flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete; to remove from the Work Site
any such Work; to accelerate all or any part of the Work; and to take any or all other
action necessary to bring Contractor and the Work into strict compliance with this
Contract.
2. Owner may perform or have performed all Work necessary for the accomplishment
of the results stated in Paragraph 1 above and withhold or recover from Contractor
all the cost and expense, including attorneys' fees and administrative costs, incurred
by Owner in connection therewith.
3. Owner may accept the defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming,
incomplete, or dilatory Work or part thereof and make an equitable reduction in the
Contract Price.
4. Ownermayterminate this Contract without liability for furtherpayment of amounts
due or to become due under this Contract.
5. Owner may, without terminating this Contract, terminate Contractor's rights under
this Contract and, for the purpose of completing or correcting the Work, evict
Contractor and take possession of all equipment, materials, supplies, tools,
appliances, plans, specifications, schedules, manuals, drawings, and other papers
relating to the Work, whether at the Work Site or elsewhere, and either complete or
correct the Work with its own forces or contracted forces, all at Contractor's
expense.
6. Upon any termination of this Contract or of Contractor's rights under this Contract,
and at Owner's option exercised in writing, any or all subcontracts and supplier
contracts of Contractor will be deemed to be assigned to Owner without any further
action being required, but Owner may not thereby assume any obligation for
-13-
CONTRACT
payments due under such subcontracts and supplier contracts for any Work
provided or performed prior to such assignment.
7 . Owner may withhold from any Progress Payment or Final Payment, whether or not
previously approved, or may recover from Contractor, any and all costs, including
attorneys' fees and administrative expenses, incurred by Owner as the result of any
Event of Default or as a result of actions taken by Owner in response to any Event
of Default.
8. Owner may recover any damages suffered by Owner.
6.4 Owner's Additional Remedv for Delav
If the Work is not completed by Contractor, in full compliance with, and as required by or
pursuant to, this Contract, within the Contract Time as such time may be extended by Change
Order, then Owner may invoke its remedies under Section 6.3 of this Contract or may, in the
exercise of its sole and absolute discretion, permit Contractor to complete the Work but charge to
Contractor, and deduct from any Progress or Final Payments, whether or not previously approved,
administrative expenses and costs for each day completion of the Work is delayed beyond the
Completion Date, computed on the basis of the "Per Diem Administrative Charge" set forth in
Attachment A, as well as any additional damages caused by such delay.
6.5 Terminations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience
Any termination or suspension of Contractor's rights under this Contract for an alleged
default that is ultimately held unjustified will automatically be deemed to be a termination or
suspension for the convenience of Owner under Section I . 1 5 of this Contract.
ARTICLE VII: LEGAL RELATIONSHIPS
AND REQUIREMENTS
7.1 Bindine Effect
This Contract is binding on Owner and Contractor and on their respective heirs, executors,
administrators, personal representatives, and permitted successors and assigns. Every reference in
this Contract to a party is deemed to be a reference to the authorized officers, employees, agents,
and representatives ofsuch party.
7.2 Relationship of the Parties
Contractor will act as an independent contractor in providing and performing the Work.
Nothing in, nor done pursuant to, this Contract may be construed (l) to create the relationship of
principal and agent, partners, or joint venturers between Owner and Contractor or (2) except as
provided in Paragraph 6.3(6) above, to create any relationship between Owner and any
subcontractor or supplier of Contractor.
-14-
CONTRACT
incomplete Work, equipment, materials, or supplies, nor operate to waive or otherwise diminish
the effect of any warranty or representation made by Contractor; or of any requirement or provision
of this Contract; or of any remedy, power, or right of Owner.
7.7 No Third Partv Beneficiaries
No claim as a third party beneficiary under this Contract by any person, firm, or corporation
other than Contractor may be made or be valid against Owner.
7.8 Notices
All notices required or permitted to be glven under this Contract must be in writing and are
deemed received by the addressee thereof when delivered in person on a business day at the address
set forth below or on the third business day after being deposited in any main or branch United
States post office, for delivery at the address set forth below by properly addressed, postage
prepaid, certified or registered mail, return receipt requested.
Notices and communications to Owner must be addressed to, and delivered at, the
following address:
Village of Oak Brook
1200 Oak Brook Road
Oak Brook, Illinois 60523
Attention: Doug Patchin, Public Works Director
Notices and communications to Contractor must be addressed to, and delivered at, the
following address:
The foregoing may not be deemed to preclude the use of other non-oral means of
notification or to invalidate any notice properly given by *y such other non-oral means.
By notice complying with the requirements of this Section, Owner and Contractor each
have the right to change the address or addressee or both for all future notices to it, but no notice
ofa change ofaddress is effective until actually received.
7.9 Governins Laws
This Contract and the rights of Owner and Contractor under this Contract will be
interpreted according to the internal laws, but not the conflict of laws rules, of the State of lllinois;
venue for any action related to this Contract will be in the Circuit Court of DuPage County, Illinois.
-16-
CONTRACT
7.10 Changes in Laws
Unless otherwise explicitly provided in this Contract, any reference to laws includes such
laws as they may be amended or modified from time to time.
7.ll Compliance with Laws
A. Compliance Required. Contractor must give all notices, pay all fees, and take all
other action that may be necessary to ensure that the Work is provided, performed, and completed
in accordance with all required governmental permits, licenses or other approvals and
authorizations that may be required in connection with providing, performing, and completing the
Work, and with all applicable statutes, ordinances, rules, and regulations, including without
limitation the Illinois Prevailing Wage Act,820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq. (see Subsection C of this
Section) (a copy of the prevailing rate of wages ascertained by the Illinois Department of Labor,
in effect as of the date of this Contract, has been attached as an Appendix to this Contract; if the
Illinois Department of Labor revises the prevailing rate of hourly wages to be paid, the revised rate
applies to this Contract); any other applicable prevailing wage laws; the Fair Labor Standards Act;
any statutes regarding qualification to do business; any statutes requiring preference to laborers of
specified classes; the Illinois Steel Products Procurement Act, 30 ILCS 56511 et seq.; any statutes
prohibiting discrimination because of, or requiring affirmative action based on, race, creed, color,
national origin, age, sex, or other prohibited classification, including, without limitation, the
Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990,42 U.S.C. $$ 12101 et seq., the Illinois Human Rights
Act,775 ILCS 5/l-101 et seq., and the Public Works Discrimination Act, 775 ILCS 10/0.01 et
seq.; and any statutes regarding safety or the performance of the Work, including the Illinois
Underground Utility Facilities Damage Prevention Act, 220 ILCS 50/l et seq., and the
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970,29 U.S.C. $$ 651 et seq.
B. Liability for Fines. Penalties. Contractor is solely liable for any fines or civil
penalties that are imposed by any govemmental or quasi-governmental agency or body that may
arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with Contractor's, or its subcontractors'
or suppliers', performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereof.
C. Prevailine Wase Act. Contractor and each subcontractor, in order to comply with
the Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq. (the "Act"), must submit to the Village a
certified payroll on a monthly basis, in accordance with Section 5 of the Act. The certified payroll
must consist of a complete copy of those records required to be made and kept by the Act. The
certified payroll must be accompanied by a statement signed by the contractor or subcontractor
that certifies that (1) such records are true and accurate, (2) the hourly rate paid is not less than the
general prevailing rate of hourly wages required by the Act, and (3) the contractor or subcontractor
is aware that filing a certified payroll that he or she knows to be false is a Class B misdemeanor.
Contractor may rely on the certification of a subcontractor, provided that Contractor does not
knowingly rely on a subcontractor's false certification. On two business days' notice, Contractor
and each subcontractor must make available for inspection the records required to be made and
kept by the Act (i) to the Village and its officers and agents and to the Director of the Illinois
Department of Labor and his or her deputies and agents and (ii) at all reasonable hours at a location
within the State.
-17¨
CONTRACT
D. Required Provisions Deemed Inserted. Every provision of law required by law to
be inserted into this Contract is deemed to be inserted herein.
7.12 Compliance with Patents
A. Assumption of Costs. Royalties. and Fees. Contractor will pay or cause to be paid
all costs, royalties, and fees arising from the use on, or the incorporation into, the Work, of patented
equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions.
B. Effect of Contractor Being Enjoined. Should Contractor be enjoined from
furnishing or using any equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or
inventions supplied or required to be supplied or used under this Contract, Contractor must
promptly offer substitute equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or
inventions in lieu thereof, of equal efficiency, quality, suitability, and market value, for review by
Owner. If Owner should disapprove the offered substitutes and should elect, in lieu of a
substitution, to have supplied, and to retain and use, any such equipment, materials, supplies, tools,
appliances, devices, processes, or inventions as may by this Contract be required to be supplied,
Contractor must pay such royalties and secure such valid licenses as may be requisite and
necessary for Owner to use such equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices,
processes, or inventions without being disturbed or in any way interfered with by any proceeding
in law or equity on account thereof. Should Contractor neglect or refuse to make any approved
substitution promptly, or to pay such royalties and secure such licenses as may be necessary, then
Owner will have the right to make such substitution, or Owner may pay such royalties and secure
such licenses and charge the cost thereof against any money due Contractor from Owner or recover
the amount thereof from Contractor and its surety or sureties notwithstanding that Final Payment
may have been made.
7.13 Time
The Contract Time is of the essence of this Contract. Except where otherwise stated,
references in this Contract to days is construed to refer to calendar days.
7.1.4 Severability
The provisions of this Contract will be interpreted when possible to sustain their legality
and enforceability as a whole. In the event any provision of this Contract is held invalid, illegal,
or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, in whole or in part, neither the validity of
the remaining part of such provision, nor the validity of any other provisions of this Contract will
be in any way affected thereby.
7,15 Entire Asreement
This Contract sets forth the entire agreement of Owner and Contractor with respect to the
accomplishment of the Work and the payment of the Contract Price therefor, and there are no other
-l 8-
CONTRACT
understandings or agreellncnts,oral or w五 tten,between Owner and Contractor with respectto the
Work and the compensation therefor.
7.16 Alllendlllents
No modiflcation,addition,deletion,revision,alteration or other change to this Contract is
effective unless and until such change is reduced to w五 ting and executed and delivered by Owner
and Contractor。
[SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS]
-19‐
CONTRACT
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have caused this Contract to be executed
by their properly authorized representatives in two original counterparts as of the Effective Date.
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
By:
Name:
Title:
Attest:
By:
Name:
Title:
CONTRACTOR
-20¨
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
STATE OF ILLINOIS )
COUNTY OF ) SS)CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
"::ff:!:i"'#r"k*ilfiof Contractor, that this deponent is authorized to make them, and that the statements contained
herein are true and correct.
Contractor deposes, states, and certifies that Contractor is not barred from contracting
with a unit of state or local government as a result of (i) a violation of either Section 33E-3 or
Section 33E-4 of Article 33E of the Criminal Code of 196l,720ILCS 5/33E-l et Sq.; or (ii) a
violation of the USA Patriot Act of 2001, 107 Public Law 56 (October 26,2001) (the"Patriot
Act") or other statutes, orders, rules, and regulations of the United States government and its
various executive departments, agencies and offices related to the subject matter of the Patriot
Act, including, but not limited to, Executive Order 13224 effective September 24,2001.
DATED:20 。
CONTRACTOR
By:
Narne:
Title:
Attest:
By:
Name:
Title:
Subscribed and Sworn to before me on 20 .
My Commission expires:
Notary Public
(SEAL)
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROJECT
ATTACHMENT A
EMENTAL SCHEDULE OF
[Check applicable boxes and insert required information.]
l. Proiect:
Renovation of the existing bunk room, and removal of existing flooring materials in
bunk room as indicated in the drawings and described herein, The general contractor
shall provide and install all materials, unless noted otherwise. Scope of work includes,
but not necessarily limited to, general interior demolition of existing walls and flooring,
new metal stud framing with gypsum wall board finish; wood trim, new electrical
receptacles and fixtures, modification of existing electrical can lights, ceiling patching,
painting, and install all new casework including the legacy lockers, as well as finished
wood bases, end panels, hardware and all accessories as shown on the drawings and
described herein. Alternate Bid includes providing and installing new carpeting in Fire
Station 93 Bunk Room (demolition for this work is part of the base bid.
2. Work Site:
Fire Station 93,725 Enterprise Drive, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523.
3. Permits. Licenses. Approvals. and Authorizations:
Contractor must obtain all required governmental permits, licenses, approvals, and
authorizations.
Commencement Date:
No work is to begin until all product and material are on site at Fire Station 93, but in
no event later than August 27,2018.
Completion Date:
Substantial Completion by September 17,2018. The Completion Date will be subject
to equitable adjustment if the Commencement Date is delayed pursuant to Subsection
2.2A of the Contract.
4.
5。
ATTACHMENT A
Insurance Coverage:
Certificates of lnsurance shall be presented to Owner within fifteen (15) days after the
receipt by the Contractor of the Notice of Award and the unexecuted contact, it being
understood and agreed that the Owner will not approve and execute the Contract until
acceptable insurance certificates are received and approved by Owner.
Each contractor performing any work pursuant to a contract with Owner and each permittee
working under a permit as required pursuant to the provisions of Title 1 of Chapter 8 of the
Code of Ordinances of the Village of Oak Brook (hereinafter referred to as "Insured") shall
be required to carry such insurance as specified herein. Such contractor and permittee shall
procure and maintain for the duration of the contract or permit insurance against claims for
injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or in connection with the
performance of the work under the contract or permit, either by the contractor, permittee, or
their agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors.
A contractor or permittee shall maintain insurance with limits no less than:
A. General Liability - $2,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence for bodily injury
personal injury and property damage, provided that when the estimated cost of the
work in question does not exceed $25,000, the required limit shall be $1,000,000;
B. Automobile Liability (if applicable) - $1,000,000 combined single limit per accident
for bodily injury and property damage;
C. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability - Worker's Compensation limits as
required by the Labor Code of the State of Illinois and Employer's Liability limits of
$ 1,000,000 per accident.
Any deductibles or self-insured retention must be declared to and approved by Owner. At
the option of Owner, either the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductible or self-
insured retention as respect to Owner, its officers, officials, ernployees and volunteers; or
the Insured shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations,
claim administration and defense expenses to the extent of such deductible or self-insured
retention.
The policies shall contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions:
D. General Liability and Automobile Liability Coverage -
(1) The Owner, its officers, ofEcials, employees and volunteers are to be covered
as@dqasrespects:liabilityarisingoutofactivitiesperformed
by or on behalf of the lnsured; pranises owned, occupied or used by the
Insured. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of
protection afforded to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers,
or agents.
-2-
ATTACHPIENT A
(2) The Insured's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respect to the
Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents. Anyinsurance
or self-insurance maintained by the Owner, its officers, officials, employees,
volunteers or agents shall be in excess of the lnsured's insurance and shall not
contribute with it.
(3) Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect
coverage provided to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers
or agents.
(4) The lnsured's insurance shall apply separately to each covered party against
whom claim is made or suit is brought except with respect to the limits of the
insurer's liability.
E. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Coverage
The policy shall waive all rights of subrogation against the Owner, its officers,
officials, employees, volunteers and agents for losses arising from work
performed by the insured for the Owner.
Each insurance policy shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be suspended,
voided, canceled by either party, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30)
days prior written notice by certified mail has been grven to Owner. Each insurance policy
shall name the Owner, its ofEcers, officials and ernployees, volunteers and agents as
Additional lnsureds. lnsurance is to be placed with insurers with a Best's rating of no less
than A: VII.
Each lnsured shall furnish the Owner with certificates of insurance and with original
endorsanents eflecting coverage required by this provision. The certificate and
endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that
insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsernents are to be on forms
approved by the Owner and shall be subject to approval by the Village Attomey before
work commences. The Owner reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of
all required insurance policies, at any time.
Each insured shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall furnish
separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for
subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein.
D. Builders Risk Insurance. This insurance must be written in completed value
form, must protect Contractor and Owner against "all risks" of direct physical
loss to buildings, structures, equipment, and materials to be used in providing,
performing, and completing the Work, including without limitation fire
extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief, sprinkler leakage, flood,
-3-
ATTACHMENT A
earth movement and collapse, and must be designed for the circumstances that
may affect the Work.
This insurance must be written with limits not less than the insurable value of
the Work at completion. The insurable value must include the aggregate value
of Owner-furnished equipment and materials to be constructed or installed by
Contractor.
This insurance must include coverage while equipment or materials are in
warehouses, during installation, during testing, and after the Work is completed,
but prior to Final Payment. This insurance must include coverage while Owner
is occupying all or any part of the Work prior to Final Payment without the need
for the insurance company's consent.
E. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. Contractor, at its sole
cost and expense, must purchase this lnsurance in the name of Owner with a
combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of not less than
$1,000,000.
F. Umbrella Policy. The required coverage may be in the form of an umbrella
policy above $2,000,000 primary coverage. All umbrella policies must provide
excess coverage over underlying insurance on a following-form basis so that,
when any loss covered by the primary policy exceeds the limits under the
primary policy, the excess or umbrella policy becomes effective to cover that
loss.
trG Each policy must have a deductible or self-insured retention of notDeductible.
more than $
XH.Owner as Additional Insured. Owner must be named as an Additional Insured
on the following policies:
General Liabilitv
The Additional Insured endorsement must identifu Owner as follows:
The Village of Oak Brook and its boards, commissions, committees, authorities,
employees, agencies, officers, voluntary associations, and other units operating
under the jurisdiction and within the appointment of its budget.
-4¨
X7.
ATTACⅡPIENT A
Other Parties as Additional Insureds. In addition to Owner, the following parties
must be named as additional insured on the following policies:
Additional Insured
Arcon Associates Inc.
Contract Price:
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
A. LUMP SUM CONTRACT
L Provide and install all materials needed for the renovation of the existing Fire Station
93 Bunk Room and demolition of existing flooring. For providing, performing, and
completing Work, the total Contract Price of :
In words
2. Altemate Bid:
Provide and install new carpeting in Bunk Room. Demolition for this work is part
of the base bid.
In words
Progress Pavments:
A. General. Owner must pay to Contractor 90 percent of the Value of Work,
determined in the manner set forth below, installed and complete in place up to
the day before the Pay Request, less the aggregate of all previous Progress
Payments. The total amount of Progress Pa5rments made prior to Final
Acceptance by Owner may not exceed 90 percent of the Contract Price.
B. Value of Work. The Value of the Work will be detennined as follows:
(1) Lump Sum Items. For all Work to be paid on a lump sum basis,
Contractor must, not later than 10 days after execution of the Contract
and before submitting its first Pay Request, submit to Owner a schedule
showing the value of each component part of such Work in form and
with substantiating data acceptable to Owner ("Breakdown Schedule").
Policy or Policies
8.
-5-
ATTACHMENT A
The sum of the items listed in the Breakdown Schedule must equal the
amount or amounts set forth in the Schedule of Prices for Lump Sum
Work. An unbalanced Breakdown Schedule providing for overpayment
of Contractor on component parts of the Work to be performed first will
not be accepted. The Breakdown Schedule must be revised and
resubmitted until acceptable to Owner. No payment may be made for
any lump sum item until Contractor has submitted, and Owner has
approved, an acceptable Breakdown Schedule.
Owner may require that the approved Breakdown Schedule be revised
based on developments occurring during the provision and performance
ofthe Work. If Contractor fails to submit a revised Breakdown Schedule
that is acceptable to Owner, Owner will have the right either to suspend
Progress and Final Payments for Lump Sum Work or to make such
Payments based on Owner's determination of the value of the Work
completed.
(2) Unit Price Items. For all Work to be paid on a unit price basis, the value
of such Work will be determined by Owner on the basis of the actual
number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and complete in
place, multiplied by the applicable Unit Price set forth in the Schedule
of Prices. The actual number of acceptable units installed and complete
in place will be measured on the basis described in Attachment B to the
Contract or, in the absence of such description, on the basis determined
by Owner. The number of units of Unit Price Items stated in the
Schedule of Prices are Owner's estimate only and may not be used in
establishing the Progress or Final Payments due Contractor. The
Contract Price will be adjusted to reflect the actual number of acceptable
units of Unit Price Items installed and complete in place upon Final
Acceptance.
C. Application of Payments. All Progress and Final Payments made by Owner to
Contractor will be applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with
respect to which they were paid and will not be applied to or used for any pre-
existing or unrelated debt between Contractor and Owner or between Contractor
and any third party.
9. Per Diem Administrative Charee:
$500 per day.
10. Standard Specifications:
The Contract also includes Owner's Village Code and Building Codes.
-6-
ATTACHMENT A
References to any of these codes means the latest editions effective on the date of the bid
openlng。
See AttachentI〕for any special proJect requirelnents.
-7¨
ATTACⅡMENT B
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M ttNOVATION PROЛ CT
ATTACHMENT B
SPECIFICATIONS
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
BUNK R00M RENOVATION
OAK BR00K ΠRE DEPARTMENT
STATION 93
725 ENTERPRISE DRIVE
OAK BR00K,Iロ ロNOIS 60523
JIJNE 12,2018
PROJECT NO.15095.2
0WNER:VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
12(Ю OAK BR00K ROAD
OAK BR00K,ILLINOIS 60523
ARCHITECT:ARCON ASSOCIATES,INC.
2050S.FINLEY ROAD,SUITE 40
LOMBARD,ILLINOIS 60148
CONSULTANT:AMSCO ENGINEERING
5115 BELMONT ROAD
DOWNERS GROVE,ILLINOIS 60515
AT
ARCON 15095.2 000101‐1TITLE PAGE
TABLE OF CONttNTS
DIVIS10N IXl…PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
Section 00 01 01-Title Page
Section 00 01 10-Table of Contents
DIVISION 01‐GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 00 00‐General Requirements
Section 01 23 00-Altemates
Section 01 33 00‐Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples
DIVISION 02‐EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section 02 41 19‐ Selective l)emolition
DIVIS10N 06¨W00D,PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
Section 06 10 01-Rough Carpentry
Section 06 40 00-InteHor Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 09‐FINISHES
Section 09 21 16-Gypsum Board Assemblies
Section 09 50 00-Ceilings
Section 09 65 00‐Resilient Flooring
Section 09 68 10-Carpet Tile
Section 09 90 00-Painting
DIVISION 26‐ELECTRICAL
Section 26 00 10‐ Basic Electrical Requirements
Section 26 05 19‐Building Wire
Section 26 05 29-Cutting,Patching,Sleeves,Hangers,and Supports
Section 26 05 34‐Conduit
Section 26 05 37‐Boxes
Section 26 05 53‐Identiflcation For Elect五 cal Systems
Section 26 27 17‐Equipment Wi五 ng
Section 26 27 26-WiHng】Devices
DIVISION 27‐COMPEUNICATIONS
Section 27 10 05‐ Structured Cabling for Voicc and l)ata― Insidc Plant
000101‐10001 10-1
01 CЮ CЮ -1‐10
012300-1-2
013300‐1‐40241 19-1-5
061001-1-4
064000-1‐40921 16-1-10
095000-1-5
096500-1‐6096810-1‐ 6
099000-1‐14
260010-1‐9260519-1-7
260529-1-3
260534-1-8
260537-1‐6260553-1-6
262717-1-2
262726‐1‐5271005-1-15
ARCON 15095.2 000110‐1TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 01 00 00
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART l GENERAL
l.01 LOCAL CODES
A. Each Contractor complies、vlth SpeCifled and applicable codes and standttds. If conflict
between codes or standtts and drawings,speciFlcations or addenda requirements,FnOre
stringent requirements shall govem.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specirlcation Sections,apply to this Section.
B, Sections of E)ivision 01 shan govern the execution ofthe work of an sections ofthe
speciflcations.
1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
A. The Contractor shan comply With an applicable federal,State,and locallaws,regulations,
ordinances,codes for standards conceming environmental control. Particular attention shan be
given,without lilnitation,to:
1. Reduction of air pollution by control of refuse buming(ifperrmtted),mininization of
dust,containment of chenucal vapors,control of engine exhaust gases,and control of
smoke fronl temporary heaters.
2. Reduction of water pollution by control of sanitary facilities,proper storage of ftels and
other potential contanunants,and prevention of siltation from land erosion.
3. Minin五 zation of noise levels.
4. Proper and legal disposal,off site unless otherwise provided,of waste and soil resulting
fronl construction activities.
5, Proper and legal disposal of excavated spoils resulting fronl construction activities per
11linois PubHc Act 96-1416 and thc lninois Environmental Protection Agency.
6. Proper and legal disposal at acceptable landflH of non― hazttous special waste if soil
analysis deterlmnes that excavated spoils are not suitable for a CCI)D Facility
l.04 SUBSTITUT10NS(“OR EQUAL'')
A. The Contractor or any Subcontractor's Proposal shan be based upon the inateHals,equipment,or
processes speciflcally named in the Contract I)ocuments.「Fhe word"processesH as used herein
includё s lnethods or systerns of construction.
B. Products are generany specifled by ASTM or other reference standard,and/or by lnanufactureris
name and model number ortrade name. When specifled only by reference standard,the
Contractor rnay select any product rneeting this standard,by any manufacturer. When several
products or rnanufacturers are specirled as being equany acceptable,the Contractor has the
option of using any product and manufacturer combination listed.
C. Before the Pre―bid Meeung,。rin the absence thereof 10 days p●or to the Bid Opening,the
Owner and Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of
those specirled under the following conditions:
1. The requestis accompanied by complete data on the proposed substitution substantiaung
ARCON 15095。2 014X100‐l GENERAL REQUIREⅣEENTS
compliance with the Contract Documents, including product identification and
description, performance and test data, references and samples where applicable, and an
itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the products specihed with data
relating to Contract Time Schedule, design and artistic effect where applicable, and its
relationship to separate contracts.
The request is accompanied by accurate cost data on the proposed substitution in
comparison with the product specified, whether or not modification of the Contract Sum
is to be a consideration.
D. Request for substitution based on paragraph above, when forwarded by the Contractor to the
Architect, are understood to mean that the Contractor:
l. Represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and
determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specif,red;
2. Will provide the same guarantee for the substitution that he would for that specified;
3. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this
contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts and the Architect's re-design cost,
and that he waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which
subsequently become apparent; and
4. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be
required for the work to be completed in all respects.
5. The Owner and Architect do not have to consider substitutions after the Pre- bid Meeting.
No substitutions shall be made unless acceptable to the Owner and Architect in writing.
I.O5 TEMPORARYSERVICES
A. Contractor shall provide own power.
B. Water is available from the building, Contractor shall field verify locations prior to bid.
C. Owner will not provide access to toilet facilities.
D. Contractor will provide his own temporary office and phone, if needed or required.
E. Contractor will remove all temporary facilities upon completion of the project.
I.06 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. The Contractor, within 14 calendar days from the contract date, shall prepare and submit for the
Architect's review an estimated Construction Schedule for the work. The Construction Schedule
shall be related to the entire project to the extent required by the Contract Documents. This
schedule shall indicate the dates for the starting and completion ofthe various stages of
construction and shall be revised as required by the conditions ofthe work, subject to the
Owner's approval.
B. The Construction Schedule shall be coordinated with the "Shop Drawings and Product Data"
schedule called for in Division 0l Section "Shop Drawings and Product Data". Both schedules
shall be submitted at the same time.
C. If the work falls behind the approved Construction Schedule, the Owner shall have the authority
to direct the Contractor to perform overtime work and holiday work, with the affected
subcontractors, to maintain the schedule. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to
the Owner.
D. The Contractor and all Subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers shall schedule materials,
deliveries and installations to conform with the Construction Schedule and provisions to this
ARCON 15095。2010000‐2GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
effect shall be included in all subcontracts.
E. It is understood and agreed by all the Contractors that the materials, tools, equipment, building
or work is entirely at their risk until same is completed. The Owner assumes no responsibility
for the loss by theft or damage.
F. The Owner and other Contractors may be working at the site during the performance of the
contract. The Owner reserves the right to direct the Contractor to schedule the order of this
work in such a manner as to not unreasonably interfere with the performance by the Owner and
other Contractors.
I,O1 CONTRACTORINSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall inspect and supervise the work to be assured that the work is performed in
accordance with contract requirements.
B. The Contractor shall reject or stop portions of the work which are not in accordance with
contract requirements.
C. By requesting the Final Payment, each prime Contractor certifies that he has provided his work
in compliance with the specifications and drawings.
I.O8 CLEANING
A. The premises and the job site shall be maintained in a neat and orderly condition and kept free
from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish during the entire construction period,
removing all crates, cartons and other flammable waste materials or trash from the working areas
as required.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the general cleaning and maintenance of the premises
and thejob and the coordination and direction ofthe clean- up ofall his Subcontractors. Ifthe
premises and jobsite are not maintained properly, the Owner may have any accumulations of
waste materials or trash removed and charge the cost to the Contractor responsible therefore. If
responsibility cannot be determined, the cost shall be prorated among, Contractors.
C. Pipe and duct shafts, chases, furred spaces, and similar spaces which are generally unfinished,
shall be cleaned by each Contractor as he finishes his work and left free from rubbish, loose
plaster, mortar drippings, extraneous construction materials, dirt and dust before preliminary
inspection of the work.
D. All areas of the building in which painting and finishing work is to be performed shall be
cleaned throughout just prior to the start of this work, and these areas shall be maintained in
satisfactory clean condition for painting and finish. This cleaning shall include the removal of
trash and rubbish from these areas; broom cleaning of floors; the removal of any plaster, mortar,
dust and other extraneous materials from all finish surfaces, including but not limited to, all
exposed structural steel, miscellaneous metal, woodwork, plaster, masonry, concrete, mechanical
and electrical equipment, piping, ductwork, conduit, and also all surfaces visible after all
permanent fixtures, grilles, registers, and such other fixtures or devices are in place.
I.O9 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
A. The Contractor shall maintain, at the site, for the Owner, one copy of all Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, approved Shop Drawings, Change Orders and other Modifications, in
good order and marked to record all changes made during construction. These shall be available
to the Architect. The Drawings, marked to record all changes made during construction shall be
delivered to the Architect for the Owner upon completion of the work.
ARCON 1509s.2 01 00 00-3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B. Permit drawings shall be maintained at the site in accordance with local requirements.
I.IO ACCIDENTS AND SAFETY RESPONSIBILITY
A. The general or prime contractor is solely responsible for supervision, monitoring, and
maintaining safe working conditions on, in and around the construction site. The Architect, his
consultants and owner are not responsible for the safety conditions on the construction site.
B. The Contractor shall report any and all accidents on the site or related to the project in writing to
his insurance company and to the Owner and Architect within 24 hours of occurrence. The
report shall contain the following information:
l. Name and address of injured person or persons;
2. Locationofoccurrence;
3. Date and time of occurrence;
4. Narrative description ofthe accident and how it occurred;
5. Extent of injuries, hospital where treated name or names of physicians in attendance;
6. Names of witnesses and, whenever possible, statements of witnesses and the name of
person taking such statement;
7. SignatureofContractor'ssuperintendent.
C. In addition, ifdeath or serious injuries or serious damages are caused, the accident shall be
reported to the Architect, and to the Owner immediately by telephone or messenger. If any
claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or any Subcontractor on account of any accident,
the Contractor shall promptly report the facts in writing to the Architect giving full details of the
claim.
I.I I TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. The Owner may employ and pay for an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection
sampling and testing of, but not limited to: soils, concrete, masonry, steel, test and balance, and
fireproofing.
B. Employment of testing laboratory will in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform
work in accordance with the contract.
C. Contractor shall cooperate with laboratory personnel and patch all surfaces and areas disturbed
by testing operations.
I.I2 COMPLETION
A. The Contractor shall:
l. Submit written certification, to Architect, that work is complete.
2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected.
B. The Architect will make an inspection within ten ( I 0) working days after receipt of certification,
together with Owner's Representative.
C. Should Architect consider that work is complete:
l. Contractor will prepare, and submit to Architect, a list of items to be completed or
corrected, as determined by the inspection.
2. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Completion, containing:
ARCON 15095。2010000‐4GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a. Proposed Date of Completion.
b. Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, verified and amended by
Architect.
c. The time within which Contractor shall complete or correct work of listed items.
d. Time and date Owner will assume possession of work or designated portion
thereof.
e. Responsibilities of Owner and Contractor for:
i) Insurance
ii) utilities
iii) Operation of mechanical, electrical and other systems
iv) Maintenance and cleaning
v) Security
f. Signatures of:
i) Architect
ii) Contractor
iii) Owner
3. Owner occupancy ofProject or Designated Portion ofProject:
a. Contractor shall:
i) Obtain certificate ofoccupancy
ii) Perform final cleaning in accordance with article "Cleaning".
b. Owner will occupy project, under provisions in Certificate of Completion.
4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within designated time.
D. Should Architect consider that work is not complete:
l. He shall notiff the Contractor stating the reasons.
2. Contractor: Complete work, and send second written notice to Architect certifying that
designated portion of Project is complete.
3. Architect and Owner's Representative will reinspect work.
I.13 WARRANTY PERIOD FOR ALL WORK
A. There is a TWO YEAR warranty period from the date of Completion as a minimum. The
warranty period and provisions may be extended in other sections of the Project Manual. The
Contractor agrees to repair and replace all defective work including all labor and materials for
the warranty period. The Contactor agrees to perform the coruective work within five (5 ) days
of receiving notice from the Architect or Owner. Emergency conditions shall require the
Contractor to perform corrective work within two (2) days. The Architect and Owner shall
determine if the corrective work is part of the warranty. Their decision is binding. If the
wzuranty work is not completed expeditiously as determined by the Owner and Architect, the
Owner reserves the right to have the corrective work completed as well as any professional fees
and the Contractor agrees he is liable for all costs within thirty (30) days of notice. After that
date l.5Vo interest per month shall be applied to the cost. The Contractor's bonds shall remain in
effect for the warranty period.
I.I4 PROJECT RECORD DOCT]MENTS
A. Throughout the progress of construction, the Contractor or Subcontractor for each major trade
ARCON 15095.2 0r 00 00-s GENERAL REQUTREMENTS
category (mechanical, electrical, elevators, etc.) shall keep a current, detailed, record ofall
changes in the installation of his own work from the conditions, locations and layout shown on
the Contract Drawings and/or Shop Drawings. This requirements does not authorize any
deviations without approval of the Owner and Architect.
B. These Record Drawings shall be readily available to the Architect. The drawings, marked to
record all changes made during construction, shall be delivered to him for the Owner upon
completion of the work. All changes shall be marked on drawings and turned over to the
Architect.
C. Suitable prints for record drawings used shall be established by the Contractor at start of
construction. The Contractor shall maintain the prints in good condition and shall use colored
pencils to mark up the prints in a legible manner to show:
l. All significant changes in schedules, plans, sections, elevations and details, such as shifts
in location of walls, doors, windows, stairs and the like made during construction.
2. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing,
lintels, concealed anchorages and knockout panels made during construction.
3. Final location ofelectric panels, f,rnal arrangement ofelectric circuits and any significant
changes made in electrical design as a result of Change Orders or job conditions.
4. Final location and arrangement ofall mechanical equipment and major concealed
mechanical work items including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, vent
stacks, drainage lines, control and shutoff valves, dampers, diverters.
5. Final location and arrangement of all connections and/or re-routing of existing utilities,
including, but not limited to, sanitary, storm, heating, electric, gas, water and telephone.
Show invert elevations of sewers and top of water lines.
6. All the above information shall be transferred to set of drawings in PDF format by the
Contractor. The PDF set shall be provided by the Contractor.
7. Shop Drawings other than for ductwork will not be acceptable as Project Record
Drawings.
D. When all revisions showing work as finally installed are made, the Record Drawings Set shall be
delivered to the Architect before final payment is made.
I.I5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Contractor shall arrange to instruct Owner's operating personnel in proper operation,
lubrication and maintenance of equipment.
B. The Contractor shall fumish a written, narrative, description of the design and function intended
for all service-connected equipment and systems, including descriptions of the normal operation
characteristics and range ofcapabilities, plus single-line diagram when required for clarity.
After approval by the Architect, the Contractor shall bind these in the Maintenance-Operation
Manual.
C. The Contractor shall provide I copy of the Maintenance-Operation Manual in PDF format,
reflecting and incorporating the following:
l. Shop Drawings as finally approved.
2. Performance curves for pumps, fans, compressors, and the like.
3. Description of materials and methods for lubrication
4. Wiring and control diagrams.
5. Start-up, operation and shut-down instructions.
6. Servicing and cleaning instructions.'7. Preventive maintenance and repair procedures.
8. Parts lists and source.
ARCON 15095.2 01 00 00-6 GENERAL REQLIIREMENTS
D. Each manual shall be include a cover sheet with title and index or table of contents page.
I.16 FINALINSPECTION
A. Contractor shall submit written certification that:
l. Contract documents have been reviewed.
2. Portion of project for which he is responsible has been inspected for compliance with
contract documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with contract documents.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's Representative and are
operational.
5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection with all punch list items completed.
B. Architect will make f,rnal inspection within ten ( l0) days after receipt of certification, with
Owner's Representative.
C. Should Architect consider that work is finally complete in accordance with requirements of
contract documents, he will request Contractor to make project closeout submittals.
D. Should Architect consider that work is not finally complete:
1. He shall notiff the Contractor and state reasons.
2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send second
written notice certifying that work is complete.
3. Architect will reinspect woTk.REINSPECTION COSTS
E. Should Architect be required to perform additional inspections because offailure ofwork to
comply with original certifications of Contractor, Contractor will compensate Architect for
additional services. Contractor shall pay Architect same hourly rate as shown in Paragraph l5 of
the Instructions to Bidders in the Project Manual.
I.I7 CLOSEOUT SI.]BMITTALS
A. Submit the following:
l. Project Record Documents and Record Drawings.
2. Operation and Maintenance Data.
3. Guarantees and Bonds, if specified.
4. Keys and Keying Schedule, if applicable.
5. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials, if specified.
6. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations.
7 . Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities:
a. Certificates of lnspection:
i) Mechanical and Plumbing equipment.
ii) Electrical equipment.
iii) Fire Protection systems.
b. Contractor shall furnish written certification that materials furnished on project
meet all requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act. They shall also
furnish written certifications that all materials comply with the requirements of the
current NFPA #102 and NFPA #101, Code for Safety to Life from Fire in
Buildings and Structures (Life Safety Code).
ARCON 15095.2 01 00 00-7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
8. Letter from each Contractor and Prime Contractor certifying that no asbestos-containing
products were used in this project.
9. Consent ofSurety.
10. Balancing Reports.
I l. Warranties.
B. Project Record Drawings, Record Documents, Certifications, and Operation and Maintenance
manuals shall be submitted to Architect in pdf format for review to confirm that all required
documents have been provided by Contractor.
l. Upon review of documents by Architect, Contractor shall submit all Record Drawings,
Record Documents, Certifications, and Operation and Maintenance Manuals to BHFX for
"Interactive Project Closeout". Cost for "Interactive Project Closeout" shall be included
in Contractor's bid.
I.I8 FINALDOCUMENT OF ACCOI.JNTS
A. Submit final statement of accounting to Architect.
B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments.
l. Original Contract Sum.
2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
a. Previous Change Orders.
b. Cash Allowances.
c. Other adjustments.
d. Deductions for uncorrected work.
e. Deductions for liquidated damages.
f. Deductions for Reinspection Payments.
3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.
4. Previous payments.
5. Sum remaining due.
C. Architect will prepare final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not
previously made by Change Orders.
I.I9 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Contractor shall submit final application in accordance with provisions of General Conditions,
Supplementary General Conditions and as amended by the Instructions to Bidders in the Project
Manual.
I,2O FINAL CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
A. Architect will issue final certificate in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.
I.2I DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
ARCON 15095。2010000‐8GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor,
or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation,
erection, application, and similar operations.
J. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be
performed by accredited or unionized individuals ofa corresponding generic name, such as
"carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople
of the corresponding generic name.
K. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed
a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
L. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.22 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality
levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that
are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
l. Minimum Quantity or Quality lrvels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
ARCON 15095.2 01 00 00-9 GENERAL REQUTREMENTS
shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly
with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within
reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are
minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer
uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies ofapplicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
l. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source and make them available on request.
E. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale
Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade &
Professional Associations of the U.S."
F. Symbols: Where symbols are not defined within Contract Documents, they shall represent items
adopted by the American Institute of Architects (AIA) and the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI).
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOTUSED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 01 OO OO
ARCON 15095。2010000‐10 GENERAL REQUIREIⅥ ENTS
PART
PART 2
PART 3
3.01
1.02
1.03
SECTTON 0123 00
ALTERNATES
GENERAL
RELATED DOCI.JMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 0l Specification sections, apply to this section.
SUMMARY
A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain
work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid
amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of
construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation
methods described in the Contract Documents.
B. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to
incorporate the alternate into the work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely and fully
integrate that work into the project.
B. Include as part ofeach alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the
alternate.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work ofthis contract.
D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Altemates" is included at the end of this section. Specification
sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the
work described under each alternate.
PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
EXECUTION
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. ALTERNATE NO. l: Flooring in Bunk Room
l. Provide the additional cost to remove the existing flooring and provide new flooring
within the bunk room 103 area only, as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
B. ALTERNATE NO. 2: Flooring Work
L Provide the additional cost to remove the existing flooring and provide new flooring
within Rooms l0l, 104, 107, 108, 109 and I l0 only, as shown on the drawings and
104
ARCON 15095.2 012300‐1ALTERNATES
specified herein.
C. ALTERNATE NO. 3: Casework
l. Provide the additional cost to provide and install new casework in the bunk room 103.
This includes Units A, B and C and finished wood base units for a complete installation.
END OF SECTION 01 23 OO
ARCON 15095。2012300‐2ALTERNATES
SECTION 01 33 00
SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
PART l GENERAL
l.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B. Related Sections include the following:
L Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0l Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
I.O2 CONFLICTS
A. In the event ofany conflict between the provisions hereofand the provisions ofthe
General and Supplementary Conditions, the more stringent or higher quality requirements
shall apply.
I.O3 ELECTRONICSUBMITTALPROCEDI.]RES
A. The following types of submittals shall be transmitted electronically as outlined in this
section.
l. Shop Drawings
2. Product Data
3. Manufacturer'sinstallationinstructions.
4. Specified product list
B. Electronically transmit each submittal to the Architect as follows:
l. Submittals shall include an electronic letter of transmittal
2. Electronic submittals shall be made only in PDF format.
3. Electronic submittals shall be reviewed and returned in PDF format
4. Electronic submittal file names shall be easily understood and shall include
relevant numeric reference (e.g. CSI Section Number) and naming conventions.
5. Submitted using ARCON's Newforma website
I.O4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Each Contractor shall prepare a schedule of specific target dates for the submission and
return of shop drawings, product data and samples required by the Contract Documents.
The Schedule shall be divided into construction categories. All shop drawings and
product data for interrelated items shall be scheduled for submission at the same time.
The Shop Drawing Submittal Schedule, submitted by the Contractor, shall provide the
Architect with at least l5 calendar days from the date the Architect receives a submittal,
until the date the submittal is required to be mailed back to the Contractor.
B. All shop drawings, product data and samples shall bear the following identification:
SHOP DRAWINGS,SAMPLES,
PRODUCT DATA
ARCON 15095。2013300‐1
C.
Date of Submittal.
Submittal Number.
Title of Project.
Name of Contractor and date of his approval.
Name of Subcontractor or supplier and date of submittal to Contractor.
Reference to Specification section and paragraph and/or Drawing Number(s).
The specific location of the work covered.
Any qualification, departure or deviation from the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
Any additional information required by the Specification for the particular
material.
"Shop Drawings" include fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings;
manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules, descriptive literature, catalogs and
brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams; all other drawings and
descriptive data pertaining to materials, equipment, piping, duct and conduit systems, and
methods of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment or
systems and the position thereof conform to the Contract requirements. Shop Drawings
shall be of sufficient detail to indicate all conflicts with other Subcontractors.
l. NOTE: Reproduction of drawings by any photographic, xerographic or other
similar technique or process, for incorporating the material contained into a shop
drawing, is strictly prohibited.
2. Architect will furnish at Contractor's request CAD Base Drawings for use in
developing shop drawings
a. Contractor shall be required to sign CAD waiver provided by Architect.
b. Contractor shall be charged handling fee of$250 per sheet payable to
Architect.
3. CAD Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCad 2004
only. Drawings shall include only doors, walls, windows, and room numbers.
"Product Data" are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instruction,
brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a
material, product or system for some portion of the Work.
All material, equipment, etc., indicated on the shop drawings and product data submitted
as furnished by another Subcontractor shall be so stated with the respective
Subcontractor's name or section of work. Under no circumstances will the term "By
Others" be permitted on the shop drawings.
The Contractor shall submit all required shop drawings and product data as received from
each Subcontractor, in accordance with the approved schedules, and in any event, with
such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work'or in that of any other Contractor
or Subcontractor. The Architect shall, within l5 calendar days, or such longer period as
may under the circumstances be reasonable, review shop drawings and product data.
l. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittal by architect's
consultants, Owner, or other parties is required allow 2l Calender days for initial
review. Items requiring concurrent review:
a. Doors, frames, and hardware.
b. Elevators.
c. Masonry.
d. Louvers.
e. Mechanical equipment curbs.
SHOP DRAWINGS,SAPIPLES,
PRODUCT DATA
D.EF.
ARCON 15095。2013300‐2
G.HM.
f. Precast Concrete.
C. Architectural items containing electrically operated components
Prior to submission, the Contractor shall thoroughly check all shop drawings and product
data as to measurements, size of members, materials and all other details to satisfu himself
that they conform to the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.
By approving and submitting shop drawings and product data, the Contractor thereby
represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, construction
criteria, materials, and similar data, and that he has checked and coordinated each shop
drawing with the requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.
If the shop drawings or product data show variations from Contract requirements because
of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall make specific mention
ofsuch variation in his submittal letter. Any such variations are subject to review by the
Architect.
The Architect shall review shop drawings or product data only for conformance with
design intent of the project. The Architect's review will not be construed as:
l. Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements;
2. Relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for any error in details, dimensions
or otherwise that may exist.
3. Accepted departures from additional details or instructions previously furnished
by the Architect, unless the Architect has specifically accepted the variation in
accordance with the thirteenth paragraph ofthis article.
Subcontractors shall submit to the Architect through the Contractor; four prints ofeach
drawing, including fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings, and such other
drawings as required under the various sections of the Specifications; four copies of
manufacturers'descriptive data for materials, equipment and fixtures, including catalog
sheets, showing dimensions, performance characteristics and capacities, wiring diagrams
and controls, schedules, installation instructions and otherpertinent information as
required; all in accordance with the second paragraph ofthis article.
Shop drawings and product data with no corrections will be stamped "CONFORMS
WITH DESIGN CONCEPT", and those requiring only minor corrections will be stamped
"NOTE MARKINGS". Those stamped "CONFORMS WITH DESIGN CONCEPT" can
be used for ordering, fabrication and erection. Those stamped "NOTE MARKINGS" can
also be used for ordering, fabrication, and erection, but the original drawings must be
corrected and new transparencies submitted for final acceptance. Ifdrawings resubmitted
for final acceptance have changes other than those previously noted, such changes must
be identified and explained in the letter of transmittal by which the drawings are
submitted,
If major corrections are required, the Architect will return the sepia transparency stamped
"RESUBMIT". The Contractor shall correct the original drawing as required and then
submit new documents to the Architect for approval. The Architect will review the
corrected shop drawing and return sepia transparency to the Contractor until final
approval has been given.
Shop drawings which do not have the Architect's signature and stamp 'CONFORMS
WITH DESIGN CONCEPT", or "NOTE MARKINGS" shall not be permitted ar the site,
At least one ( I ) complete set of shop drawings bearing the Architect's stamp shall be kept
at the site, in the Contractor's field office, for reference at all times.
SHOP DRAWINGS,SAMPLES,
PRODUCT DATA
K.
L.
ARCON 15095。2N.
013300…3
105
O. No work in the shop or field shall be started until the Architect has approved the shop
drawings and samples for that segment of the work, nor shall work be done from any shop
drawings not bearing the Architect's stamp of approval.
SAMPLES
A. "Samples" are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship
and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.
B. The Contractor shall submit to Architect, samples of all materials, equipment, fixtures,
appliances and other fittings, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work
or in that of any other contractor or Subcontractor and in accordance with the approved
schedules. The Architect shall, within l5 calendar days or such longer period as may be
reasonable, check such samples, but only for conformance with the design concept ofthe
project. The Architect's determination shall be final and binding.
C. Unless otherwise required in the Specifications, three (3) samples of sufficient size to
indicate general visual effect shall be submitted to the Architect. Where samples must
show a range ofcolor, texture, finish, graining, or other similar property, submit three (3)
sets of pairs illustrating the full scope of this range. One set of "CONFORMS WITH
DESIGN CONCEPT" samples shall be retained at the Construction Manager's field
office.
D. Samples shall bear the identification specified above in this section.
E. Samples will be accepted by Architect only if all delivery charges are prepaid.
PRODUCTS (Not used)
EXECUTION (Not used)
END OF SECTION 013300
SHOP DRAWINGS,SAMPLES,
PRODUCT DATA
PART 2
PART 3
ARCON 15095。2013300‐4
SECTION 02 4t t9
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 GEI{ERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Demolition requires the selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of
the following:
l. Existing flooring as shown
2. Existing partial height partitions, complete.
3. All existing Casework ( loose and Bult-in)
B. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
2. Division 0l Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction,
protection facilities, and environmental-protection measures for building demolition
operations.
3. Division 0l Section "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings, structures,
and site improvements.
4. Division 23 Sections for demolishing or relocating site mechanical items.
5. Division 26 Sections for demolishing or relocating site electrical items.
6. Division 3l Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and
below-grade improvements not part of building demolition.
7. Division 33 for demolishing or relocating site utilities.
I.O2 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule: Submit schedule indicating proposed methods and sequence ofoperations for
selective demolition work to Architect for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for
shut-off, capping and continuation ofutility services as required, together with details for dust
and noise control protection.
l. Provide a detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure unintemrpted
progress of Owner's on-site operations.
2. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of existing building.
I.O3 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Notices: Prior to start of demolition, provide all notices and obtain all permits required by
authorities havingjurisdiction. In the event offailure to provide required notice or permits, pay
penalties assessed, including any penalties assessed against the Owner, the Architect, or other
parties.
B. Occupancy: Owner will be continuously occupying areas of the building immediately adjacent to
areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition in manner that will minimize need
for disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to
Owner of demolition activities which will severely impact Owner's normal operations.
C. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of structures to be
demolished,
ARCON 15095。2024119‐1SELECTⅣE DEP10LIT10N
l. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by
Owner in so far as practicable. However, variations within structure may occur by
Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work.
D. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed, but of salvable value to
Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from
site as they are removed.
l. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
E. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms ofprotection required to protect
Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work.
l. Provide protective measures required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's
personnel and general public to and from occupied portions ofbuilding.
2. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities havingjurisdiction.
3. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement
or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
4. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed
during demolition operations.
5. Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary.
6. Construct temporary insulated solid dustproof partitions where required to separate areas
where noisy, dirty or dusty operations are performed. Equip partitions with dustproof
doors and security locks if required.
7. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of
existing construction on exterior surfaces, and installation ofnew construction to ensure
that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building.
8. Remove protections at completion of work.
F. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations at no
cost to Owner.
G. Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference
with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
l. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without
permission from authorities havingjurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or
obstructed traffrc ways if required by governing regulations.
H. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable
materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior ofducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices
during fl ame-cutting operations.
I. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect
against damage during demolition operations.
l. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when
authorized in writing by authorities havingjurisdiction. Provide temporary services
during intemrptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.
2. Maintain sprinkler service at all times during selective demolition.
J. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods
to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing
regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
ARCON 15095。2024119‐2SELECTIVE DEMOLIT10N
PART 2
PART 3
3.01
3.02
1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,
flooding, and pollution.
K. Extermination: Employ a certified exterminator and treat areas of building indicated in
accordance with governing health regulations for rodent and insect control.
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
EXECUTION
INSPECTION
A. Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be
performed. Photograph existing conditions ofstructure, surfaces, equipment or to surrounding
properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition. File with
Architect prior to starting work.
PREPARATION
A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement or
collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
l. Cease operations and notify Architect immediately if safety of structure appears to be
endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for
continuing operations.
B. Cover and protect fumiture, equipment and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage when
demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed.
C. Erect and maintain dust-proofpartitions and closures required to prevent spread ofdust or fumes
to occupied portions of the building.
l. Where selective demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the
building, construct dust-proof partitions of minimum 4 inch studs, 5/8 inch drywall (oints
taped) on occupied side, ll2 inch fire-retardant plywood on demolition side, and fill
partition cavity with sound-deadening insulation.
2. Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work.
D. Locate, identify, stub off and disconnect utility services not indicated to remain.
l. Provide by-pass connections necessary to maintain continuity ofservice to occupied areas
of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shut-down of
service is necessary during change-over.
3.03 DEMOLITION
A. Perform selective demolition in a systematic manner. Use methods required to complete work
indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations.
l. Sawcut and demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry
at junctures with construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools;
do not use power-driven impact tools.
2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and remove materials so as to not
impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors or framing.
3. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
ARCON 15095。2024119‐3SELECTⅣE DEⅣ10LIT10N
4. For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb
adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible.
B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent ofthe
conflict. Submit report to Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from
Architect, reiurange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress
without delay.
3.04 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHAMCAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
l. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Division 01.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: L,ocate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanicaUelectrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
l. Contractor shall arrange to shut offindicated services/systems.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. Ifservices/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fre-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
5. Floor slabs may contain pipng or conduit systems. This Contractor is responsible for
taking any measures required to ensure no conduits or other services are damaged. This
includes but is not limited to x-ray or similar non-destructive means.
6. Cut off exterior pipe a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below grade. Cap, valve, or plug
and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
7 . Existing Utilities: Locate, identifu, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities
serving portion(s) of building to be demolished.
8. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations ofauthorities havingjurisdiction.
3.08 SALVAGE MATERIALS
ARCON 15095。2024119‐4SELECTIVE DEⅣ10LIT10N
A. Salvage Items: Where indicated on Drawings as "Salvage-Deliver to Owner", carefully remove
indicated items, clean, store and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt.
l. Historic artifacts, including comerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and
tablets, antiques, and other articles ofhistoric significance remain the property ofthe
Owner. Notify Architect if such items are encountered and obtain acceptance regarding
method of removal and salvage for Owner.
3.09 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building
site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site.
L If hazardous materials ure encountered during demolition operations, comply with
applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection
against exposure or environmental pollution.
2. Burning of removed materials in not be permitted on site.
3.IO CLEAN-UP AND REPAIR
A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from
site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean.
B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Retum adjacent areas to condition
existing prior to start of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces
soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.
END OF SECTION O 4I 19
ARCON 15095.2 024119‐5SELECTⅣE DEMOLIT10N
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART l GENERAL
l.01 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the fonowing:
1. Wood b10cking and nailers.
2. Wood flコ dng and sleepers.
3. Plywood backing panels.
1.02 DEΠ NIT10NS
A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specifled in other Sections and not exposed,unless
otherwlse lndicated.
B・ Lumber grading agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference thenl,include the following:
1. NELMA―Northeastem Lumber Ⅳ[anufacturers Association.
2. NLGA―National Lumber Grades Autho五 ty.
3. RIS―Redwood lnspection Service.
4. SPIB―Southem Pine lnspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB―West Coast Lumber lnspection Bureau.
6. WWPA‐Westem Wood Products Association.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory―fabHcated product. Indicate component
mateHals and diinenslons and include construction and application details.
B. MateHal Certiflcates: For dimenslon lumber specifled to comply with nunimum anowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design valucs approved by the
Ame五 can Lumber Standards Co―ittee Board of Review.
C. Rescarch/Evaluation RepOrts: For the fonOwing,Showing compliance with building code in
effect br Proiect
l. Power―driven fasteners.
2. POwder―actutted fasteners.
3. Expans10n anchors.
1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber,plywood,and other panels;place spaccrs between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under cOveHngs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WoOD PRODUCTS,GENERAL
A. Lumber: D()C PS 20 and applicable rules oflumber grading agencies certifled by the AIneHcan
Lumber Sttndards Co―ittec Board of Review.
ARCON 15095。2 o61o00_l ROUGH CARPENTRY
l. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for
2-inch nominal(38-mm) actual thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber
Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
B. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade and any of the following
species:
l. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
2. Douglas fir-south; WWPA.
3. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.
4. Hem-fir; WCLIB orWWPA.
5. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
l. Blocking.
2. Cants.
3. Nailers.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum
moisture content and any of the following species:
l. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, orWWpA.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with l5 percent maximum moisture content and any of the
following species and grades:
l. Mixed southern pine, No.2 grade; SPIB.
2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north), 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWpA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir,2 Common grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB,
orWWPA.
2.04 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS l, Exposure l, C-D Plugged,
fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than ll2 inch(12.7 mm)
thick.
ARCON 15095。2061000‐2ROUGH CARPENTRY
2,05 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this Article for material and manufacture.
l. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners with hordip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A I53M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads
and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sheathing Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape for sealingjoints and penetrations in sheathing
and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required.
B. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that
is approved for use with type ofconstruction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel
manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit,
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, sleepers, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
l. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table2304.9.l, "Fastening Schedule," in the International Building Code.
D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as
required.
3.02 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work, Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
ARCON 15095.2 061000‐3ROUGH CARPENTRY
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry
work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement.
3.03 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance offinish work.
B. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, with wood blocking or
noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
3.04 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Do not splice structural members between supports.
3.05 WOOD STRUCTTIRAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
L Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide.
2. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
a. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
b. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the International Building Code unless
more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings.
3.06 EXCESS MATEzuALS AND WASTE
A. Remove excess material or waste that cannot be used, as described above, and legally dispose of
off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 06 10 OO
ARCON 15095。2061000‐4ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 40 00
1NttRIOR ARCH1lECWRAL W00DWORK
PART l GENERAL
l.01 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the foHowing:
1. Interior Wood THm
B. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
I,O2 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
L Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type ofpreservative used, net amount ofpreservative retained, and chemical treatment
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated
material.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material
indicated.
l. Plastic laminates.
D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
W00DWORK
ARCON 15095。2064000‐1
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to
that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility
for production of interior architectural woodwork.
D. Performance shall be in accordance with Custom Grade of the Woodwork Institute "Manual of
Millwork", latest edition.
l. If provisions for the Grade specified are in conflict with, or modified by the drawings
and/or specifications, the modifications shall govem.
E. Contractors and their personnel engaged in the work shall be able to demonstrate successful
experience with work of comparable extent, complexity and quality to that shown and specified.
l. Fabricator shall be a member/licensee in good standing of the Woodwork Institute.
2. Installer shall be a memberflicensee in good standing of the Woodwork Institute.
I.O5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions" Article.
1.06 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
l. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
I,O7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2,OI MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the WIC quality standard for each
type ofwoodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B. WoodCharacteristics:
INttRIOR ARCHITECTURAL
W00DWORKARCON 15095。2064000…2
l. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for
softwood.
2. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-I, either veneer core or particle core, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS l.
4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, M-2-Exterior Glue.
5. Medium-Density Fiberboard: Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade
MD-Exterior Glue.
6. Hardboard: AHAAl35.4, Class I Tempered.
7. [.ow emitting core:
a. NAUF M-2 Particleboard
i) For casework having recycled content
ii) For casework being manufactured without the use of urea formaldehyde.
iii) For products having chain of custody certificates certifying that the wood
used in the casework complies with FSC requirements.
b. NAUF Plywood
i) Plywood that meets or exceeds the standards set forth by APA for structural
use panels
ii) For casework being manufactured without the use of urea formaldehyde.
iii) For products having chain of custody certificates certi$ing that the wood
used in the casework complies with FSC requirements.
2.02 INTERIORWOODTRIM
A. Softwood Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Kiln-dried finished lumber
(S4S) ofone ofthe following species and grades:
1. Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA..
B. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Clear, kiln-dried, red
oak finished lumber (S4S), plain sawn or sliced.
C. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: DOC PS l, A-D Interior, thickness as indicated but not less
than l/2 inch.
2,03 FASTENERS
A. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face ofexterior
walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead
expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors,
B. Hardboard Paneling Anchors:
l. Concrete Machine Screw Anchor (Expansion Anchor)
2. G.S.A. Specifications FF-S-325, Group I, Type I, Class l.
3. #10 x l-112" (min) Round head zinc plated
C. MDF Adhesive
l. Water based latex adhesive, low VOC, cartridge paneling adhesive.
ARCON 15095.2 06 40 OO .3 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
wooDwoRK
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing hunudity conditions in installation areas before
instanation.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork,exarmne shop― fabHcated work for completion and
complete work as required,including removal of packing and backpHnjng.
3.02 1NSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard:Instan woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 forthe salne grade
specifled in Part 2 ofthis Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. Instan woodwork level,plumb,true,and straight. Shim as required with conccaled shims.
Instan level and Plumb(including tops)tO a tolerance of lノ 8 inch in 96 inches(3 1111n in 2400
nlm).
C. Sc五 be and cut woodwork to nt attoining work,and reflnish cut surfaces and repair damaged
flnish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates, Secure with
countersunk,concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. 1」se
flne flnishing nails or rlnishing Screws for exposed fastening,countersunk and fllled flush with
woodwork and inatching rlnal「Inish if transparent Flnish is indicated.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork,、vhere possible,to elinunat3 hnctional and visual
defects;where not possible to repair,replace woodwork.AttustjOinery for unifom appearance.
B, Clean woodwork on exposed surfaces. Touch up shop―applied rlnishes to restore damaged or
solled areas.
END OF SECTION 064000
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
W00DWORK
ARCON 15095。2064000¨4
SECTION 09 21 16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART l GENERAL
l.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Inte●or gypsum wallboard.
2. Non-load―bearing steel ianung.
Bo Related Sections include the fonowing:
1. Drawings and general provislons of the Contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions and l)ivision 01 SpeciFlcation Sections,apply to ths Section.
1.02 DEΠ NIT10NS
A. Gypsum Board Teminology:Referto ASTM C ll for derlnitions oftems for gypsum board
assemblies not deFlned in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire‐Test―Response Characte五 stics: For gypsum board assemblies with rlre_resistance ratings,
provide inaterials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E l19 by an independenttesting and inspecting agency acceptable to authoHties having
ju五 sdiction,
1. Fire‐Resistance‐Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from ULIs∥Fire
Resistance Directory."
B. Sound Transnlssion CharacteHstics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings,provide
mateHals and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classifled according to ASTM E 413 by a qualifled independenttesting agency.
1. STC―Rated Assemblies:Indicated by design designations from GA-600,"Fire Resistance
Design Manual."
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND ttDLING
A. Deliver rnatenals in oHginal packages,containers,or bundles bearing brand name and
identiflcation of Fnanufacturer or supplier.
B. Store mateHals inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against dalnage from
weather,direct sunlight,suJ¨e contanlination,corrosion,construction trafflc,and other causes.
Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Liinitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum bo嗣
manufactureris wntten reconlmendations,whichever are more stnngent.
ARCON 15095。2 092116‐l GYPSIIM BOARD ASSEPIBLIES
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
l. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Clark Steel Framing Systems.
b. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
c. Dale Industries, Inc. - Daleflncor.
d. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
e. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind.
f. National Gypsum Company.
g. Scafco Corporation.
h. Unimast, Inc.
i. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems.
2. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a, American Gypsum Co.
b. Certainteed
c. Georgia Pacific Gypsum LLC
d. National Gypsum Company.
e. Trim-tex
f. United States Gypsum Co.
2,02 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated.
B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 64ll{ 64IM, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch ( 1.59 mm)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 inch ( I .21 mm) diameter wire.
C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows:
l. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a
qualified independent testing agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.
D. Hangers: As follows:
L Wire Hangers: ASTM A64llA 64lM, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0. 162 inch
A.l2mm) diameter.
E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538
inch ( 1.37 mm), a minimum ll2 inch ( 12.7 mm) wide flange, with manufacturer's standard
corrosion-resistant zinc coating.
l. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)
b. Depth: 3-518 inches
ARCON 15095.2 09 2116-2 GYPST]M BOARD ASSEMBLIES
F. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C635, direct-hung system composed of
main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
l. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring 640 System.
c. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System.
2.03 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Components, General: As follows:
I . Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
l. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.7 mm).
2. Depth: 3-518 inches (92.1 mm)
C. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of
gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
l. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track.
c. Dietrich Metal Framing; Slotted SLP-TRK.
D. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate
depth of studs.
l. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak.
b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
c. Dietrich Metal Framing; Slotted SLP-TRK.
E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
l. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.03 l2 inch (0.79 mm).
F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538 inch ( 1.37 mm) bare steel thickness, with minimw ll2
inch (12.7 mm) wide flange.
l. Depth: l-ll2 inches (38.1 mm).
2. Clip Angle: l-l12by l-l12inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm),0.068-inch (l.73mm) thick,
galvanized steel.
G. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with [ASTM A 653/A 653M,
hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
ARCON 15095.2 09 2116.3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1. HarShaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).
b. Depth: 1-ll2 inches (38.1 mm).
2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm),
b. Depth: 1-518 inches (41.3 mm)
3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, comrgated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare
steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
4. Tie Wire: ASTM A64llA 641M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch (1.59
mm) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 inch ( L2l mm) diameter wire.
L Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
2.04 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correslrond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and ASM C1396.
l. Type X:
a. Thickness: 5/8 inch ( 15.9 mm).
b. Long Edges: Tapered.
c. Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
l. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receivesjoint compound; use at exposed
panel edges.
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.
d. Curved-Edge Comerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved
openings.
B. Aluminum or Plastic Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
l. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. MM Systems Corporation.
d. Pittcon Industries.
ARCON 15095.2 09 2116.4 GYPSTJM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
e. Trim-tex
2.06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 474.
B. Joint Tape:
l. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper or Fiberglass Tape: Nominal 2 inches wide self
adhering tape
2. Cementitious Backer Units: Alkali-resistant Fiberglass Tape: Nominal 2 inches wide
polymer coated alkali-resistant mesh tape.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats and with gypsum
board type.
l. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat onjoints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
a, Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
2. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying+ype, all-purpose compound.
3. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.07 AUXILIARYMATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
l. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.1 l2 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
l. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. l5 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, l/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud
size.
E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: See Division 07 Section "Insulation"
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
ARCON 15095.2 09 2I 16-5 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings
and that hangers will develop their full strength.
l. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in
advance oftime needed for coordination and construction.
B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
l. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fire-resistive materials.
Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building
structure not more than24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of gypsum board assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive
material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated.
Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
3.03 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Installation Standards: ASTM C754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing
installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board
assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories,
furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's
"Gypsum Construction Handbook. "
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading
imposed by structural movement.
L Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure
2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor.
3. Install slip-typejoints at head ofassemblies that avoid axial loading ofassembly and
laterally support assembly.
a. Use deepJeg deflection track where indicated.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.04 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:
l. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location ofhangers required to support standard
ARCON 15095.2 09 2116-6 GYPSI.]M BOARD ASSEMBLIES
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Secure rod or angle hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
a. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
b. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
c. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for
panel attachment are level to within l/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on
each member and transversely between parallel members.
C. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
D. Wire-tie furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies
indicated.
E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than that
required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards.
I . Hangers: 48 inches ( I 2 19 mm) o.c. unless more stringent spacing is indicated on
drawings.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches ( I 2 19 mm) o.c. unless more stringent
spacing is indicated on drawings.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): l6 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless more stringent
spacing is indicated on drawings.
F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system
meets vertical surfaces, Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
3.05 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board
assemblies abut other construction.
l. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt-felt or foam-gasket
isolation strip between studs and wall.
B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary
not more than l/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue
framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
L Cut studs ll2 inch ( l3 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief.
2. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of
ARCON 15095.2 09 2116-7 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings,
install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and
decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.
D. Install steel studs and funing at the following spacings:
l. Single-Layer Construction: l6 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2. Multilayer Construction: l6 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end ofeach panel
can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable
written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb
anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to
jamb studs.
L Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extendjamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside offloor or roof
structure above.
G. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless
otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above
door heads,
3.06 APPLYING FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
avoid abutting endjoints in the central area ofeach ceiling. Stagger abutting endjoints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than l/16 inch ( I .5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into
place.
E. Locate edge and endjoints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind endjoints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end ofeach panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
G. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
H. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced intemally.
l. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ARCON 15095.2 09 2I 16.8 GYPSI.]M BOARD ASSEMBLIES
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in
area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural
members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to
fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow l/4 to 3/8 inch
(6.4 to 9.5 mm) wide joints to install sealant.
I. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide ll4 to 112 inch (6,4 to 12.7 mm) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges
with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges
and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints,
and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead ofacoustical sealant. Install acoustical
sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with
ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off
sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions
above acoustical ceilings.
K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.
l. Space screws a maximum of l2 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.
3,07 PANELAPPLICATION METHODS
A. Single-Layer Application:
l. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before walUpartition board application to the greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of board.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
B. Multilayer Application on Partitions/lValls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and
face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or funing member with baseJayer joints,
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on
opposite sides of partitions.
C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
D. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
E. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
ARCON 15095。2092116‐9 GYPSIIM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
3.08 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Instatl control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
3.09 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residualjoint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Applyjoint tape over gypsum boardjoints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish lrvels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
l. kvel l: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where
indicated, unless a higher level offinish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies
and sound-rated assemblies.
2. l*vel 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.10 FrELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will
conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not
proceed with installation ofgypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have
been corrected.
l. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project,
will be ready for above-ceiling observation.
2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board
ceilings:
a. Installation of 80 percent oflighting fixtures, powered for operation.
b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems.
c. Installation of air-duct systems.
d. Installation ofair devices.
e. Installation ofmechanical system control-air tubing.
f. Installation of ceiling support framing.
END OF SECTION 09 2I 16
ARCON 15095.2 092116‐10 GYPSIIM BOARD ASSEⅣIBLIES
SECTTON 09 50 00
CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Extent ofeach type acoustical ceiling is indicated on drawings and/or drawing schedules.
B. This Section includes the following:
l. Patching of existing suspended ceiling system.
C. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provision of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for site built gypsum board ceilings and
clouds.
I,O2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
l. ASTM A64l Standard Specification forZinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
2. ASTM B22llB22lM: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
3. ASTM C423: Standard Test for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficient by
the Reverberation Room Method.
4. ASTM C635 : Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of
Metal Suspended Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panel Ceilings.
5. ASTM C636: Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panels.
6. ASTM 81264: Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
7. ASTM El4l4: Standard Test Method for Airbome Sound Attenuation between Rooms
Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum.
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for acoustical ceiling unit and suspension
system required.
B. Submit samples of available colors and finish for radial trim. Once trim color has been chosen,
submit l2 inch sample with approved color and finish applied to actual trim profile. Submit
shop drawings indicating layout arrangement, installation layout and details, and manufacturers
data.
I.O4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to project site in original,
unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against
damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
ARCON 15095.2 09 50 OO.1 CEILINGS
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
I,O5 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
I.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
I.O7 EXTRAMATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Fumish extra materials described below matching products
installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.
B. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0Vo of each type of
amount installed.
C. Color, textures, and patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated or,
ifnot otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors, surface
textures, and patterns available for acoustical ceiling units and exposed metal suspension system
members of quality designated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to those indicated for each designation in the
acoustical panel ceiling schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.02 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: provide metal suspension systems of type, structural
classification and finish indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Metal Suspension System Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated int the
Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3.
l. Baked enamel white finish for acoustical panel system. Heads of pop rivets to match
color of grid.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table l, Direct
Hung.
D. Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper, prestretched, Class I
coating, sized so that stress at 3-times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table l, Direct Hung),
will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 12 gage.
ARCON 15095。2095000‐2CEILINGS
E. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated,
manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge
details and suspension systems indicted; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension systems runners.
L For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetrations exactly.
2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal
of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed
suspension member.
F. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's
extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's
product designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips,
complying with the following requirements:
l. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for
type ofuse and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 22llB 22M for alloy and
temper 6063-T5.
2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed by
other trades for support of acoustical ceilings.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges ofeach ceiling. Avoid use ofless-than-halfwidth panel at borders.
3.O2 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and to comply
with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements as indicated, and CISCA
standards applicable to work.
B. Install tile with pattern to align with light fixture layout.
C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from
building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6 inches from each end of spaced 4'-
0" along each carrying channel or direct-hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to
tolerance of l/8 inch in l2-0".
D. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye-
screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not
deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. Do not attach to ductwork, conduit, piping,
or any other mechanicaUelectrical item.
E. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers
only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force by bracing,
countersplaying or other equally effective means'
F. Install edge moldings or type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations
ARCON 15095.2 09 50 OO-3 CEILINGS
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
G. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over l6 inch o.c. and not more than 3 inch
from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of l/8 inch in 12 -0". Miter
corners accurately and connect securely.
H. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
L lnstall acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a near,
precise fit.
J. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities havingjurisdiction,
and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommend by panel manufacture's written instructions,
unless otherwise indicated or required.
K. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by
support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at
penetrations.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
ARCON 15095.2 095000‐4CEILINGS
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SCHEDULE PANEL TYPE ATl
A. Water-Felted, Mineral-Base Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Panel Ceiling Type ATI:
L Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panels complying with the following:
a. Fine Fissured; Armstrong Industries, Inc.
b. Fine Fissured; Certainteed
c. Radar Climaplus; USG Interiors, Inc.
2. Size:24 by 48 inches (610 by 610 mm).
3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
4. Edge Detail: Square.
5. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2,
water felted.
6. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern designation (description) as specified by product
designation.
7. Color: White.
8. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 0.80.
9. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.55 in compliance with ASTM C423.
10. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 35 in compliance with ASTM El4l4.
I l. Dimensional Stability: Humidity resistant performance and intercept antimicrobial solution on
front and back.
12. Warranty: Warranty period l0 years after date of substantial completion for acoustical panels and
grid system.
B. Suspension System for this ceiling type:
l. Provide one of the following:
a. Prelude XL; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. l5l16" Classic Hook; CertainTeed.
c. 1200 System/zll-219 Main Tee; Chicago Metallic Corporation
d. DX/DXL; USG Interiors, Inc.
2. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed
from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolystically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A653lA 653M, GOl (2001) coating designation, with prefinished l5l16-inch-
(24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges, other characteristics as follows:
a. Structural Classification: Heavy duty system.
b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.
c. Face Design: Flush face.
d. Cap Material: Steel sheet.
e. Cap Finish: Painted white.
END OF SECTION 09 50 OO
ARCON 15095。2095000‐5CEILINGS
SECTION 09 65 OO
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
l. Rubber floor tile
2. Vinyl Wall Base
3. Resilient molding accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
2. Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition"
3. Division 09 Section "Carpet Tile"
I,O2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Provide each type ofresilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single
manufacturer, including recommended primerS, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds.
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of resilient flooring and
accessory.
B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's standard color charts in form of
actual sections ofresilient flooring, including accessories, showing full range ofcolors and
patterns available, for each type ofresilient flooring required'
C. Manufacturer'scurrentinstallationinstructions
D. Moisture Suppression Membrane: Manufacturer's warranty registration with concrete subfloor
moisture test results and building ambient air temperature and relative humidity test results.
E. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.
I.O4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F
03 degC) or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time
periods:
l. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
ARCON 15095。209`500‐1RESILIENT FL00RING
D. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have been
cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by manufacturer's
recommended bond and moisture test.
E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
F. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F35 deg.
I.O5 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Owner.
B. Floor Tile: Furnish I box for every 25 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, color run,
and pattern of floor tile installed. Furnish maintenance materials from same manufactured lot as
materials installed and enclosed in protective packaging with identifying labels indicating
building location of each color, texture and clor run..
C. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Fumish not less than l0 linear feet (3 linear m) for every
250 linear feet ( 150 linear m) or fraction thereof, ofeach type, color, pattern, and size of
resilient product installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OI RESILIENT COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Provide color and patterns as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.
2.02 RUBBER FLOOR TILE (RT-I)
A. Resilient Rubber Tile Flooring with the following physical characteristics:
l. Complies with requirements for ASTM F 1344 Standard Specification for Rubber Floor
Tile,Class l-Aand l-B.
2. Manufactured from a homogeneous composition of l00Vo synthetic rubber.
3. Overall thickness: l/8".
4. Tile Size: l8"xl8" or24"x24"
5. Tile Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's range of options for this
product.
6. ASTM D 2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness: 65
Shore A.
7 , ASTM D 3389 Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics Abrasion Resistance: < 1.00
gram weight loss.
8. ASTM D 2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated
Flooring: Exceeds Federal Standards and A.D.A. requirements for slip-resistant.
9. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit - passes at 250 PSI.
10. ASTM E 989, Standard Classification for Rating Impact Insulation (IIC) using ASTM E
492, Acoustical Measurement of Impact Sound Transmission Through Floor-Ceiling
Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine - 40 IIC.
I I . ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source - equal to or greater than 0.45 watts/cm2.
12. Phthalate, chlorine and halogen-free.
ARCON 15095。209`500‐2RESILIENT FL00RING
B. Available Manufacturers: Provide one of the following:
l. Flexco
2. Johnsonite
3. Nora Systems
4. Roppe
5. Mondo
2,03 VINYLWALLBASE
A. Vinyl Wall Base: Provide vinyl base complying with FS SS-W-40, Type II, with matching end
stops and preformed or molded corner units, and as follows:
l. Height: 4 inch.
2. lrngth: 120 foot rolls.
3. Thickness: l/8 inch gage.
4. Style: Standard top-set cove.
5. Finish: Matte.
6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color palette.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
l. Flexco
2. Johnsonite
3. Nora Systems, Inc.
4. Roppe
5. VPI
2,04 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
l. Flexco
2. Johnsonite
3. Nora Systems, Inc.
4. Roppe
5. VPI
B. Resilient Edge Strips: l/8 inch thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or
bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected by Architect from standard colors
available; not less than I inch wide. Install at all changes in floor material.
C. ADA/IAC compliant Glue down vinyl moldings (as below or as indicated on drawings):
l. Transition/Adaptormoldings:
a. For transition between resilient tile and carpet
b. For transition between resilient tile and porcelain, ceramic or other tile
c. For transition between ceramic tile and carpet
d. For transition between carpet and exposed concrete
2. Reducer moldings/Edge guard moldings:
a. For transition between resilient tile and exposed concrete.
b. For transition between ceramic tile and exposed concrete
c. For transition between carpet and exposed concrete.
ARCON 15095.2 09 65 OO.3 RESILIENT FLOORING
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to
suit material and substrate conditions.
B. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Installer to inspect subfloor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory. A satisfactory
subfloor surface is defined as one that is smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, coatings
preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or appearance.
B. Inform the Architect if any of the following conditions are found:
l. Cracks in the subfloor exceed l/4 inch in width.
2. Differential settlement exceeding l/8 inch has occurred across a crack.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify internal RH of the concrete according to ASTM F2170.
l. Record readings and submit to moisture suppression membrane manufacturer in
accordance with manufacturer' s warranty registration.
2. Do not install if relative humidity levels within the concrete exceed 95Vo.
B. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are sufficiently
cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence ofcuring compounds.
C. Do not proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory.
D. Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows:
l. Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including
curing compounds incompatible with resilient flooring adhesives, paint, oils, waxes and
sealers.
2. The floor surface must be sound, solid, clean and free ofdebris, dust and any other
particles.
3. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer.
4. For smoothing in ridges, filling cracks to a smooth finish, and leveling areas up to l/8
inch thick, or as required to fill joints, etc., provide and install SD-F Feather Finish, as by
ARDEX, Inc., per manufacturer's instructions. This product is trowelable and does not
require a primer, but the floor surface must be sound, solid, clean, and free ofdebris, dust
and any other particles. This work is to be expected in all rooms and shall be part of the
Base Bid.
5. For any existing flooring depressions over l/8 inch thick, provide and install ARDEX K-
l5 self-leveling underlayment, or equivalent, as per manufacturer's instructions, after
priming existing floor with ARDEX P-51 primer, diluted l: I with water. Again, the floor
surface must be sound, solid, clean and free of debris, dust and any other particles. After
installation of the non-trowelable ARDEX K-15, use the SD-F Feather Finish to smooth
any edges which may not feather down to the existing floor.
6. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor.
7 . Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to
ARCON 15095.2 09 65 OO-4 RESILIENT FLOORING
application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with inanufacturer's directions.
3.03 RESILIENT FL00RING INSTALLAT10N
A. GENERAL
l. Install resilient flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's
printed instructions. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and
similar openings.
2. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets,
pipes, outlets and permanent columns, walls and partitions.
3. Tightly cement resilient flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and
puckering atjoints, telegraphing ofadhesive spreader marks, or other surface
imperfections. Hand roll resilient flooring at perimeter ofeach covered area to assure
adhesion.
4. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
that tile at opposite edges ofroom are ofequal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of
cut widths less than ll2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless
otherwise shown.
5, Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken,
cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable.
6. Match tiles for color and pattem by using tile from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all hxtures. Broken,
cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable.
7. Lay tile in "checkerboard" fashion with grain reversed in adjacent tiles.
8. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with
fl ooring manufacturer's directions.
9. Use only water based adhesives. Do not use solvent based adhesives.
10. Protect moisture suppression membrane from damage during flooring installation. Do not
tear, rip, puncture, or delaminate membrane when applying trowel on adhesive. Repair
damaged areas according to membrane manufacturer's instructions before flooring
installation. Provide continuous, intact moisture suppression membrane under entire
designated floor area.
I l. Adhere resilient tile directly to moisture suppression membrane using tile manufacturer's
recommended water based adhesive.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or
areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner
units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base
to substrate throughout length ofeach piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical
surfaces.
B. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging
strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed.
C. Fully adhere rubber stair tread units to stair tread substrate throughout length of tread. Provide
additional securement at nosing of rubber stair tread unit as required.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
D. Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring:
l. Sweep and vacuum floor thoroughly.
ARCON 15095.2 09 65 OO-5 RESILTENT FLOORING
2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer has
elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well-sealed in adhesive.
3. Damp-mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil.
4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner
recommended by resilient fl ooring manufacturers.
5. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with resilient
fl ooring manufaclurer's directions.
END OF SECTION 09 65 OO
ARCON 15095。2096500¨6 RESILENT FL00RING
SECTION 09 68 10
CARPET TILE
PART l GENERAL
l.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
l. Carpet Tile.
2. Accessories
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
2. Division 07, Section "Surface Applied Vapor Reduction System" for moisture mitigation
sYStem.
3. Division 09 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories
installed with carpet.
C. ReEntry Specification Scope of Work (Owner required recycling of existing carpeQ
l. Owner specifies that existing carpet and existing carpet waste be recycled in the best
possible manner. A reclamation plan will be submitted that will provide directions for
the reclamation of recyclable carpet at the job site. "Environmentally friendly" carpet
recycling methods should be performed subsequent to job completion. In this case,
"environmentally friendly" methods consists of either:
a. Recycling is tuming waste materials into new materials of the same value, such as
vinyl backing into vinyl backing.
b. Upcycling involves turning waste materials into more valuable products. For
example, using waste PET (plastic from soda bottles) to create Terratex fabric.
c. Downcycling creates less valuable products from waste materials. Tuming nylon
face fiber into car parts or carpet padding, including nylon face fiber in recycled
backings, or using carpet for waste-to-energy are good examples ofdowncycling.
d. Repurposing allows a product to be reused by an organization or individual.
e. Interface assist in facilitating the donation ofused carpeting to charities and other
non-profi t organizations.
I.O2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on all
physical characteristics specified in this section. Include installation recommendations for each
type of substrate required.
B. Preinstallation: Check list prior to installation of carpet.
C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
l. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet.
2. Existing flooring materials to be removed.
3. Existing flooring materials to remain.
4. Carpet type, color, and dye lot.
ARCON 15095。209`810‐1CARPET TILE
5. [,ocations where dye Iot changes occur.
6. Seam layout:
a. Seam location, types and methods.
b. Seams run length the length of the area.
c. Main traffic runs long, rather than across, the seam.
d. Incident light does not strike across the seam.
e. Seams are away from areas subject to pivoting naffic.
f. Seams are not perpendicular to doorway openings.
7. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.
8. Pile direction.
9. Type, color, and location ofinsets and borders.
10. Type, color, and location ofedge, transition, and other accessory strips.
I l. Transition details to other flooring materials.
D. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattem, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
l. Carpet 12 inch (300 mm) square Sample.
2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12 inch (300 mm) long Samples.
3. Carpet Seam: 6 inch (150 mm) Sample.
E. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
F. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.
Include the following:
l. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
I.O3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
B. Flooring contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation including floor preparation.
The carpet installed in accordance with "Installation fo Commercial Carpet" CRI-104.
C. Carpet manufacturer shall provide field service experts to assist in the project startup.
Manufacturer shall notify, in writing, Architect, General Contractor, and Owner if any
installation instructions are not followed.
I.O4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
B. All materials shall be delivered no earlier than 48 hours prior to start of installation.
I.O5 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
ARCON 15095.2 09 6810.2 CARPET TILE
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
l. Relative humidity 35-55 percent.
2. Ambient air temperature between 65 degrees F. and 75 degrees F.
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet,
install carpet before installing these items.
I.06 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace
carpet, at no cost to Owner, that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified
warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual
traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more
than l0 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, delamination, tuft bind, and
moisture penetration.
l. Warranty Period: Lifetime from date of Substantial Completion.
I.O7 EXTRAMATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
l. Carpet: Tiles equal to 5 percent ofamount installed for each type indicated, but not less
than l0 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OI CARPET TILE (CPT-I)
Carpet material shall be exactly what is shown and described on drawngs.
A. Physical Characteristics:
l. Face Construction: Patterned Loop.
2. Gauge: 5164 inch.
3. Stitches: I 1.3 per inch.
4. Pile Height: 0.187 inches for finished carpet per ASTM D 418.
5. Surface Pile Weight: 35.5 oz./sq. yd.
6. Density: Not less than 7,000 (as calculated by face weight x 36 divided by pile).
7. Primary Backing: Fiberglass Reinforced Composite Closed Cell Vinyl Cushion.
8. Secondary Backing: LTP, UPS, orUnibond.
9. Width: 24" x24" Modular Tile.
ARCON 15095。2096810‐3CARPET TILE
B. Performance Characteristics: As follows:
I . Static Generation: Not more than 3.0 Kv per AATCC- I 34
2. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than lfi) lbf (445N) perASTM D2646.
3. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC-I65.
4. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) per
AATCC-I6.
5. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria;
not less than l-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal growth; per
AATCC-I74.
6. Flammability: Pass DOC-FF-I-70 Pill test and meets NFPA Class I per ASTM E-648
glue down.
7. Smoke: Not more than 450 flaming mode per NFPA 258 NBS Smoke chamber.
8. Stain Resistance: Meets GSA requirements for AATCC 175.
9. Tuft Bind: 20 lbs. average wet or dry per ASTM D-I335.
10. Moisture penetration: Lifetime per Dow Modified Spill Test Method E (Part 2) and
moisture vapor Transmission Per ASTM E96.
C. AdhesiveSystemCharacteristics:
L Carpet: Securely attached to the floor in compliance with American With Disabilities Act
- Section 4.5.3
2. Product shall be installed in accordance with Standard For Installation of Commercial
Carpet CRI-104.
3. Floor Adhesive: [,ow VOC, wet set adhesive. Adhesive shall be approved and supplied
by carpet manufacturer.
4. Adhesives shall have lifetime product performance warranty.
2.02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided by or recommended by the following:
l. Carpetmanufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that
is provided by the following:
l. Carpetmanufacturer.
C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to
prevent pile loss at seams.
D. Transition Strips: Provide and install "metal edge" transition stip as by Tandus Centiva. This
strip will have to be modified to allow it to follow the curved transition between the carpet tile
and the LVT in the library. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and
ARCON 15095.2 09 68 10.4 CARPET TILE
comply with requirements specifi ed.
l. Usemanufacturer'spreinstallationchecklist.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3,02 PREPARATION
A. Inform the Architect if any of the following conditions are found:
l. Cracks in the subfloor exceed 114 inch in width.
2. Differential settlement exceeding l/8 inch has occurred across a crack.
B. Verify internal RH of the concrete according to ASTM F2170.
L Record readings and submit to moisture suppression membrane manufacturer in
accordance with manufacturer' s warranty registration.
2. Do not install if relative humidity levels within the concrete exceed 957o.
C. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are sufficiently
cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence ofcuring compounds.
D. Do not proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory.
E. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive
carpet installation.
F. Subfloor preparation shall meet all conditions as specified in the manufacturer's installation
handbook instructions.
G. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. Skim coat the entire existing
floor slab to meet carpet manufacturers requirements.
H. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by the following:
l. Carpetmanufacturer.
I. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.03 MOISTURE SI.]PPRESSION MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install moisture suppression membrane with smooth film side facing concrete slab.
B. Install in accordance with membrane manufacturer's current written installation instructions.
C. If any job site condition interferes with compliance with manufacturer's instructions, contact
manufacturer and obtain written job specific procedures. Notify Architect describing the job site
condition and manufacturer's job specific instructions.
ARCON 15095。2096810‐5CARPET TILE
3.M INSTALLATION
A. Use only water based adhesives. Do not use solvent based adhesives.
B. Protect moisture suppression membrane from damage during flooring installation. Do not tear,
rip, puncture, or delaminate membrane when applying trowel on adhesive. Repair damaged
areas according to membrane manufacturer's instructions before flooring installation. Provide
continuous, intact moisture suppression membrane under entire designated floor area.
C. Adhere carpet directly to moisture suppression membrane using carpet manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
D. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down
Installation."
l. Use trowel l/8" x l/8" x 1116" for adhesive application.
E. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Carpet on Stairs."
F. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of
carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under
the door in closed position.
G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
H. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and builrin furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
I. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
J. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
K. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
l. Remove excess adhesive, sezrm sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI I 04, Section I 5, "Protection of Indoor Installations. "
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
flxtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09 6E 10
ARCON 15095.2 096810‐6CARPET TILE
SECTION (x) 90 OO
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
I.OI SI.'MMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
l. Exposed interior items and surfaces.
2. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
C. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not
to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item
or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether
or not schedules indicate colors. Ifthe schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect
will select from standard colors and f,rnishes available.
l. Painting includes field painting ofexposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of
mechanical and electrical equipment.
D. Work under this contract includes but is not necessarily limited to the following:
l. High pressure washing and abrasive blasting in accordance with the requirements of .
2. Surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance of painting including
cleaning, small crack repair, patching and making good surfaces and areas to the limits
defined under MPI preparation requirements
3. Surface preparation and prime painting surfaces for wall coverings prior to installation in
accordance with MPI and wall covering manufacturer's requirements
4. Specific pre-treatments noted in this section or specified in the MPI Architectural
Painting Specifi cation Manual.
5. Priming (except where pre-primed with an approved primer under other sections of work)
and painting of structural steel, miscellaneous metal, ornamental metal and primed steel
equipment.
6. Priming and back-priming of wood materials as noted in this section or specified in the
MPI architectural Painting Specification Manual.
7. Painting of all semi-concealed areas (e.g. inside of light troughs and valances, behind
grilles, and projecting edges above and below sight lines).
8. Painting and finishing of all exposed to view elevator equipment and components (i.e.
doors and door frames) unless pre-finished.
9. Painting ofexposed to view mechanical (heating, ventilating and plumbing) services and
equipment, (e.g. ducts, sprinkler piping, etc.) and electrical work to extent noted on Finish
Schedule unless pre-finished.
10. Re-painting of existing surfaces and hnishes when adjacent to new painting work where
applicable including surface preparation, prime and finish coats in accordance with MPI
Repainting requirements.
I l. Provision ofsafe and adequate ventilation as required over and above temporary
ventilation supplied by others, where toxic and/or volatile / flammable materials are being
ARCON 15U)5.2 09 90 OO.1 PAINTING
used.
E. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels.
l. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork and casework.
b. Acoustical wall panels.
c. Metal toilet enclosures,
d. Metal lockers.
e. Elevator entrance doors and frames.
f. Elevator equipment.
g. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
h. Light fixtures.
i. Distribution cabinets.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible
spaces:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas.
c. Ceiling plenums.
d. Utility tunnels.
e. Pipe spaces.
f. Duct shafts.
g. Elevator shafts.
3, Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
c. Chromium plate.
d. Copper.
e. Bronze and brass.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
c. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or
other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or
nomenclature plates.
F. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
2. Division 02 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving"
3. Division 02 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving"
4. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel"
5. Division 05 Section "Steel Joists"
6. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications"
ARCON 15095。2099000‐2PAINTING
7. Division 08 Section "Steel Doors and Frames"
8. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies"
9. Division 09 Section "Wood Gymnasium Flooring"
10. Divisions 23 wrd 26: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions
23 and 26, respectively.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. The latest edition of the following reference standards shall govem all painting work:
l. Architectural Painting Specification Manual by the Master Painters Institute (MPI)
including identifiers, evaluation, systems, preparation and approved product list.
(Hereafter referred to as MPI Painting Manual) as issued by the local MPI Accredited
Quality Assurance Association having jurisdicition.
2. Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound of Consumer Products,
Method 24 (for Surface Coatings) of the Environmental Protection Agency.
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
l. Material List:
a. Provide an inclusive list ofrequired coating materials.
b. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and
application.
c. Identi$ each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
d. Finish Schedule of indicating room name, room number, product, manufacturer,
sheen, and associated MPI System
2. Manufacturer's Information:
a. Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and
instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for
use,
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products furnished are in accordance with VOC
Content limits and other requirements of State of Illinois Title 35 (Section 223).
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.
l. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative Samples ofthe actual substrate.
l. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers.
Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required
sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each
sample for location and application.
3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture
onlY:
ARCON 15095。2099000‐3PAINTING
a. Painted Wood: Provide two 12 inch (300 mm) square samples of each color and
material on hardboard.
b. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 by 8 inch ( 100 by 200 mm) samples of
natural- or stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists ofcompleted projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses ofarchitects and owners, and other information
specified.
E. Submit a finish schedule of all painting materials indicating room name, room number, product
F. At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color
coding for all colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance.
G. At project completion provide properly packaged maintenance materials.
I.O4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall have a minimum of five years proven satisfactory expserience and shall show
proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters
throughout the duration of the work.
B. Qualifiedjourneypersons, as defined by localjurisdiction shall be engaged in painting and
decorating work. Apprentices may be eomployed provided they work under the direct
supervision of a qualified journeyperson in accordance with trade regulations.
C. All materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to requirements of the latest edition
of the MPI Painting Manual
D. All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the Approved Product List
section of the MPI Painting Manual.
E. The painting contractor shall receive written confirmation of the specific surface preparation
procedures and primers used for all fabricated steel items from the fabricator/supplier to
ascertain appropriate and manufacturer compatible hnish coat materials to be used before
painting any such work.
F. Regulatory Requirements:
l. Conform to the latest edition of Industrial Health and Safety Regulations issued by
applicable authorities havingjurisdiction in regard to site safety (ladders, scaffolding,
ventilation, etc.)
2. Conform to requirements oflocal authorities havingjurisdiction in regard to the storage,
mixing, application and disposal of all paint and related waste materials.
3. Notify the Paint Inspection Agency on award of contract and make application for
assignment of an Inspector using appropriate forms supplied by the Agency as well as
provide a copy of the project painting specification, drawings, color schedule and list of
proposed materials for review purposes prior to commencement of work.
4. Fully cooperate at all times with the requirements of the Paint Inspection Agency in the
performance oftheir duties, including providing access and assistance as required to
complete inspection work.
G. Mock-Ups: When requested by the Architect, provide duplicate 12" square samples of surfaces
or acceptable facsimiles requested painted with specified paint or coating in colors, gloss / sheen
and textures required to MPI Painting Manual standards for review and approval. When
ARCON 15095.2 09 90 OO-4 PAINTING
105
approved, samples shall become acceptable standard ofquality for appropriate on site surface
with one of each sample retained on site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting
system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating
system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
l. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
l. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from
fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
Where toxic and/or volatile / explosive / flammable materials are being used, provide adequate
fireproof storage lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g. no
smoking) as required.
Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous
combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that constitute a fire
hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) shall be stored in suitable closed and rated containers
and removed from the site on a daily basis.
Waste Management and Disposal:
l. Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.)
are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain
information on these controls from applicable State and Local government departments
having jurisdiction.
2. All waste materials shall be separated and recycled. Where paint recycling is available,
collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility.
Materials that cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an
appropriate manner.
3. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive
tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.
4. To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems
1.06
B.
C.
D.EARCON 15095。2099000‐5PAINTING
or into the ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to:
a. Retain cleaning water for water based materials to allow sediments to be filtered
out. In no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water.
b. Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated
containers and ensure proper disposal.
c. Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations forcontaminant
recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering.
d. Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with
hazardous waste regulations.
e. Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available).
f. Close and seal tightly partly used cans ofmaterials including sealant and adhesive
containers and store protected in well ventilated fire safe area at moderate
temperature.
g. Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials not required by
the Owner and deliver or ilrange collection for verifiable re-use or re-
manufacturing.
I.O7 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 degC).
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
l. Painting may continue during inclement weather ifsurfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
I.O8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the
quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for
storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.
l. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with extra paint materials in the quantities indicated below:
a. Quantity: Fumish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than I gal.
(3.785 L) or I case, as appropriate, ofeach material and color applied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2,OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
l. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore).
2. PPG Architectural Coatings (PPG).
3. Pratt & Lambert (PNL)
4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (SW).
ARCON 15095。2099000‐6 PAINTING
2,02 MATERIALS
A. Only materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, etc.) listed in the
latest edition of the MPI Approved Product List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project.
All such material shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
B. Other materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, solvents, etc. shall be the highest quality
product of an MPI listed manufacturer and shall be compatible with paint materials being used
as required.
C. All materials used shall be lead and mercury free and shall have low VOC content where
possible.
D. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of
blemishes, sags, air entrapment, etc.
E. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings
designated by local Code requirements and/or authorities having jurisdiction.
2.03 MIXING AND TINTING
A. Unless otherwise specified herein or pre-approved, all paint shall be ready-mixed and pre-tinted.
Re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps,
complete dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss uniformity.
l. Tinted primers are not acceptable.
B. Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not
use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.
D. If required, thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's
instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer
and provide copy of instructions to Architect.
2.04 FINISH AND COLORS
A. Unless otherwise specif,red herein, all painting work shall be in accordance with MPI Custom
Grade finish requirements.
B. Colors shall be as selected by the Consultant from a manufacturer's full range of colors. Refer to
Finish Schedule and drawings for identification and location ofcolors.
C. Interior colors and/or patterns shall be consistent throughout with two (2) separate schemes
prepared.
D. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled, walls shall be painted the same color within a given area.
E. Ceilings (except those having a spray textured coating) shall be painted white.
F. Corridors shall be painted the same color on all floors with two (2) separate color schemes
prepared for doors and trim.
G. Designated rooms / spaces shall be painted using different colors or more than one color than
ARCON 15095。2099000‐7PAINTING
typical rooms in accordance with Finish Schedule requirements with a minimum of two (2)
colors required.
H. Except as noted herein or indicated on the Finish Schedule, interior walls and ceiling surfaces
shall be painted in accordance with the following criteria over appropriate prime / sealer coat:
l. All areas (except as noted): washable latex with G3 (eggshell) finish.
2. Laundry facilities / rooms, public wash / shower / bathrooms, residential kitchens and
bathrooms: washable latex with G5 (semi-gloss) finish.
3. Public change / wash / shower rooms and institutional facility bathing and shower rooms:
epoxy (tile-like) G5 (semi-gloss) finish for wet surfaces.
4. Public and institutional facility "clean" or "sanitary" areas such as food preparation and
laboratory areas: epoxy (ile-like) G5 (semi-gloss) finish for dry surfaces.
I. Doors shall be painted a different color than door frames and trim with walls a different color
than either. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled all doors, frames and trim shall be painted
using a G5 (semi-gloss) finish.
J. Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, exit and vestibule doors shall be painted a
contrasting color to walls and a different color than any other door in the same area.
K. Access doors, prime coated butts and other prime painted hardware (e.g. door closers), registers,
radiators and covers, exposed piping and electrical panels shall be painted to match adjacent
surfaces (i.e. same color, texture and sheen), unless otherwise noted or where pre-finished.
L. Plywood service panels (e.g. electrical, telephone and cable vision panels) including edges shall
be back-primed and painted to match painted wall mounted on.
M, The inside of light valances shall be painted gloss white.
N. The inside of all duct work behind louvers, grills and diffusers for a minimum of 460 mm ( 18")
or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, shall be painted using flat black (non-reflecting) paint.
2,05 GLOSS AND SHEEN RATINGS
A. Gloss / Sheen Ratings:
l. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating ofapplied paint, in accordance with the
following MPI values:
2. Gloss level ratings of an painted surfaces shan be as specirled and as■oted on Finish
ARCON 15095。2 09 90 4XD‐8 PAINTING
Gloss trvel Description Units at 60 degrees Units at 85 degrees
Gl Matte or Flat finish Oto 5 l0 max.
G2 Velvet finish O to 10 10 to 35
G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 35 nin.
G4 Satin「Inlsh 20 to 35
G5 Semi‐Gloss rlnish 35 to 70
G6 Gloss flnish 70 to 85
G7 High-Gloss finish >85
PART 3
3.01
Schedule.
EXECUTION
Condition of Surfaces:
A. Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine (and test as required) all
conditions and surfaces scheduled to be painted and report in writing to the Contractor and
Architect any conditions or surfaces that will adversely affect work of this section.
B. No painting work shall commence until all such adverse conditions and defects have been
corrected and surfaces and conditions are acceptable to the Painting contractor.
C. Commencement of work shall not be held to imply acceptance of surfaces except as qualified
herein. Such surfaces as concrete, masonry, structural steel and miscellaneous metal, wood,
gypsum board and plaster, shall not be the responsibility ofthe Painting contractor.
D. The Painting contractor shall not be responsible for the condition of the substrate or for
correcting defects and deficiencies in the substrate which may adversely affect the painting work
except for minimal work normally performed by the Painting contractor and as indicated.
Painting Subcontractor shall assure that surfaces are properly prepared before any paint or
coating is applied.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
Preparation of Surfaces:
l. Prepare all surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements. Refer to the MPI Painting
Manual in regard to specific requirements for the following:
a. environmental conditions.
b. pH testing.
c. rust stain removal.
d. vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces.
e. clay and concrete masonry units.
f. structural steel and miscellaneous metals.
g. steel exposed to high heat.
h. galvanized and zinc coated metal.
i. dimension and dressed lumber.
j. wood decks, floors, stairs and steps.
k. stucco, plaster and gypsum board.
l. canvas and cotton coverings.
2. Sand, clean, dry, etch, neutralize and/or test all surfaces under adequate illumination,
ventilation and temperature requirements.
3. Remove and securely store all miscellaneous hardware and surface httings / fastenings
(e.g. electrical plates, mechanical louvers, door and window hardware (e.g. hinges, knobs,
locks, trim, frame stops), removable rating lhazard linstruction labels, washroom
accessories, light fixture trim, etc. from wall and ceiling surfaces, doors and frames, prior
to painting. Carefully clean and replace all such items upon completion of painting work
in each area. Do not use solvent or reactive cleaning agents on items that will mar or
remove finishes (e.g. lacquer finishes). Doors shall be removed before painting to paint
bottom and top edges and then re-hung.
4. Protect all adjacent interior surfaces and areas, including rating and instruction labels on
doors, frames, equipment, piping, etc., from painting operations and damage with drop
cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any
ARCON 15095。2099000‐9PAINTING
damage caused by failure to provide such protection.
5. Substrate defects shall be made good and sanded by others ready for painting particularly
after the first coat of paint. Start of finish painting of defective surfaces (e.g. gypsum
board) shall indicate acceptance ofsubstrate and any costs ofmaking good defects shall
be bome by the painter including re-painting ofentire defective surface (no touch-up
painting).
6. Confirm preparation and primer used with fabricator of steel items. Refer to Quality
Assurance.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and/or until all environmental conditions (heating,
ventilation, lighting and completion of other subtrade work) are acceptable for applications of
products.
B. Apply paint or stain in accordance with MPI Painting Manual Premium Grade finish
requirements.
C. Apply paint and decorating material in a workmanlike manner using skilled and trade qualified
applicators as noted under Quality Assurance.
D. Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning when environmental
conditions encourage flash-rusting, rusting, contamination or the manufacturer's paint
specifications require earlier applications.
E. Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper
consistency and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats.
l. Tinted primers are not acceptable.
G. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, apply a minimum of four coats of paint where deep
or bright colors are used to achieve satisfactory results.
H. Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects
visible from a distance up to 1000 mm (39").
I. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Unless manufacturer's directions
state otherwise, each coat shall be sufficiently dry and hard before a following coat is applied.
J. Prime coat of stain or varnish finishes may be reduced in accordance with manufacturer's
directions.
3.04 INTEzuOR PAINT AND COATING SYSTEMS
A. Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual requirements:
l. Concrete Vertical Surfaces (including horizontal soffits):
a. INT 3.lA (MPI 52): Latex G3 finish (over primer).
b. Basis-of-Design Product: ProMar 200 Z,ero VOC Interior Latex
2. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces (floors and stairs):
a. INT 3.2G (MPI 127): Concrete floor sealer, water based finish.
ARCON 15095.2 09 90 OO-TO PAINTING
b. Basis-of-Design Producr SW ArmorSeal Tread-Plex
3. Clay Masonry Units (pressed and extruded brick and only where indicated on room finish
schedule):
a. INT 4.lA (MPI lz14): Latex G3 finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product ProMar 200 Tnro VOC Interior Latex
4. Concrete Masonry Units (does not include ground and split face block and brick):
a. INT 4.2A (MPI 52): Latex finish over block filler - G3 finish.
b. The application of water repellent or clear finishes shall be done by others per
Division M Section "Masonry Assemblies"
c. Basis-of-Design Product: ProMar 200 Z,ero VOC Interior Latex
5. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications (beams, joists, and deck):
a. INT 5.lC (MPl226): Water based dry fall finish - G5 finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW Pro Industrial Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall
6. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications (columns, beams, joists, etc.):
a. INT 5.lQ (MPI l4l): Pre catalyzed acrylic epoxy - G5 finish
b. Basis-of-Design Product: Pro Industrial Pre-catalyzed Waterbased Expoxy
7. Galvanized Metal (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts,
etc.):
a. INT 5.3A (MPI 14l): Pre-catalyzed acrylic epoxy - G5 finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: Pro Industrial Pre-catalyzed Waterbased Expoxy
8. Stained Dimension Lumber (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, etc.):
a. INT 6.2J (MPI 57): Varnish Interior, Polyurethane, Oil Modified over stain - G4
finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Producl SW-Minwax Wood Classics Polyurethane Vamish
9. Stained Dressed Lumber (window frames, casings, moldings, and running trim):
a. INT 6.3E (MPI 129): Water based clear polyurethane varnish over stain - G5
finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW-Minwax Water Based Polyurethane Varnish
10. Painted Dimension Lumber (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, etc.):
a. INT 6.2D: Latex G3 finish (over latex primer).
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW Pro industrial Acrylic 866-660 series
I l. Painted Dressed Lumber (window frames, casings, moldings and running trim):
a. INT 6.3A: High performance architectural latex - G5 finish
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss 866 series
12. Plaster and Gypsum Board (gypsum wallboard, drywall, "sheet rock type material", etc.,
and textured finishes):
ARCON 15095。2099000‐11 PAINTING
a. INT 9.2A (MPI 144): Latex G3 finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW Pro Mar 200 ZnroYOC Interior Latex
13. Painting of interior game line layouts with colors as noted on approved game line layout
drawing on gymnasium flooring to be by others.
3.05 MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND RELATED SURFACES
A. Unless otherwise specified or noted, paint all 'tnfinished" conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork
and other mechanical and electrical equipment with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces,
in the following areas:
l. Where exposed-to-view in all exterior and interior areas.
2. In all interior high humidity interior areas.
3. In all boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms.
B. In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and
electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.
C. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied
by manufacturer of equipment.
D. Do not paint over nameplates.
E. Paint the inside of all ductwork where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffusers for a
minimum of 460 mm ( I 8") or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, with primer and one coat
of matt black (non-reflecting) paint.
F. Paint the inside of light valances gloss white.
G. Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.
H. Paint red or band all fire protection piping and sprinkler lines in accordance with mechanical
specification requirements. Keep sprinkler heads free ofpaint.
I. Paint yellow or band all natural gas piping in accordance with mechanical specification
requirements.
J. Backprime and paint face and edges ofplywood service panels for telephone and electrical
equipment before installation to match adjacent wall surface. l,eave equipment in original finish
except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished
items.
K. Paint exterior steel electrical light standards. Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation
equipment.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND CONDITIONS OF ACCEPTANCE
A. Al surfaces, preparation and paint applications shall be inspected.
B. Painted exterior and interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness ifany
of the following defects are apparent to the Owner or Architect:
l. Brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing
by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials in paint
coatings.
ARCON T5095.2 09 90 00.12 PAINTING
2. Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets,
corners and re-entrant angles.
3. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause.
4. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the
weather.
5. Damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray paint, etc.).
C. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable ifany ofthe following are evident under
natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including daylight) for
interior surfaces:
l. Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles
from a distance ofnot less than 1000 mm (39").
2. Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles
from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39").
3. Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soff,rt and other overhead surfaces when viewed at
normal viewing angles.
4. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen, texture,
and hiding across full surface area.
D. Painted surfaces rejected by the inspector shall be made good at the expense ofthe Contractor.
Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas or areas without sufficient dry film
thickness ofpaint shall be repainted. Runs, sags ofdamaged paint shall be removed by scraper
or by sanding prior to application of paint.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect all exterior surfaces and areas, including landscaping, walks, drives, all adjacent building
surfaces (including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc.) and equipment and any labels and signage
from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other
suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by failure to provide such
protection.
B. Protect all interior surfaces and areas, including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc. and equipment
and any labels and signage from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields,
masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by
failure to provide such protection.
C. Erect barriers or screens and post signs to warn of or limit or direct traff,rc away or around work
area as required.
3.08 CLEAN TIP
A. Remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using means
and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.
B. Keep work area free from an unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials
and debris.
C. Remove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose of
same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Clean equipment and dispose of wash water / solvents as well as all other cleaning and
protective materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, masking papers, etc.), paints, thinners, paint
removers / strippers in accordance with the safety requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
ARCON 15095.2 09 90 OO-13 PAINTING
3.09 TOUCH UP PAINTING OF EXISTING ΠNISHES
A. Refer to MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual for repainting of existing Flnishes.
B. Use Flnish coat of respective new surface paint system for nunor repair of existing flnishes. 1」se
systenn pHmer where existing flnishes are damaged down to bare surface.
END OF SEC■ON 09 90 00
ARCON 15095。2099000‐14 PAINTING
SECTION 260010
BASIC f, LECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.OI GENERALCONDITIONS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for the Construction of Buildings, Standard Form of the
American Institute of Architects current edition, The Supplementary General Conditions and the
Mechanical and Electrical Special Conditions are a part of these specifications.
I.O2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Basic Electrical Requirements are specifically applicable to Divisions 26, 27 & 28.
B. This specification and accompanying plans cover and shall govern the installation of a complete electrical
system, all as specifically set forth herein, and as indicated in the plans.
C. The drawings and these specifications are complementary each to the other, and what is called for by one
shall be as binding as ifcalled for by both. They are intended to include everything requisite and
necessary to the entire finishing ofthe work notwithstanding that every item necessarily required by such
work is not especially mentioned or shown.
D. This Contractor shall furnish all labor and material necessary for the complete system and items of work
including (but not limited to):
l. All work complaint with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and the National Fire
Alarm and Signaling Code
2. All work complaint with Illinois Administrative Code (IAC) 180 and all building codes as listed in
IAC Section 180.60
3. All electrical service equipment for the building as indicated on the plans and as herein specified
and/or as required by the Service Companies for general and emergency lighting, and power.
4. Equipment wiring
5. Wiring Devices
6. Stnrctured Telecommunications Cabling and Enclosures
7. All branch circuit wiring
8. Furnish, install and connect all conduit, fiffings, outlet boxes and junction boxes, complete with
wiring as required for complete systems.
9. Furnish, install and connect all switches, receptacles and miscellaneous electrical equipment as
required and as shown on the plans and as hereinafter specified.
E. Contractor will distinctly understand that the work described herein is to be a finished job, and the whole
completed in a workmanlike manner. The omission from either the drawings or specifications of minor
details which ordinarily form a part offirst class work ofthis character and are necessary to the
completion ofthis project as contemplated and described, shall not be a cause for any extra cost, but shall
be included by this Contractor as if specifically mentioned or shown.
I.O3 REFERENCES
A. Materials, equipment and installation thereof shall conform to the latest editions of the following:
l. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
2. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials
3. CBM - Certified Ballast Manufactueres
4. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories
5. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
6. NBS - National Bureau of Standards
7. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
8. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
9. OS[L{ - Occupation Safety and Health Act.
10. UL - Underwriters Laboratores
I l. BOCA - Building Officials & Code Administrators International, Inc.
12. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society ofNorth America
ARCON 15095 260010‐l BASIC ELECttR:CAL REQU!REMENTS
13. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180
14. All materials, equipment, and installation thereof shall conform to the standards of the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and of the Underwriters'Laboratories (UL)
B. Notifr the Architect/Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed to be inadequate, unsuitable, in
violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. In every installation where regulations of electric utility and telephone companies apply, conformance
with their regulations is mandatory and any costs involved shall be included in the Contract, with the
exception of extra facility and other charges which are directly paid by the Owner. or as otherwise
instructed herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in each Division 26,27 &.28 Section:
C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems,
products and accessories in a single submittal.
D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
E. Contractor shall review all shop drawings prior to submitting them for Architect/Engineer's review.
Contractor shall stamp each shop drawing to certifi that he has reviewed it. Engineer will not check any
drawings that Contractor has not stamped with his review certification.
F. Owner's representative shall review all materials, equipment, fixtures, motor control centers, panelboards,
control panels, etc., and other appurtenances provided for this work before proceeding with the purchase
and installation.
G. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other data
necessary for the Owner's Representative to ascertain that the proposed equipment/fixtures and materials
comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly
identify equipment/fixtures being submitted.
H. Submittals for individual system and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item or
component shall be made for the system as a whole. Where necessary, submit plans of the system
drawing on sheet sizes same as the contract drawings. Partial submittals will not be considered for
approval.
I. Owner's Representative review of shop drawings will be rendered as a service only and shall not be
considered as a guarantee ofmeasurements or ofbuilding conditions, nor shall it be construed as relieving
the Contractor ofbasic responsibilities under his contract.
J. Ifthe shop drawings show variations from contract requirements because ofshop practice or other
reasons, Contractor shall make specific reference to such variation in his letter of transmittal in order that,
of acceptable, suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment; otherwise Contractor will not be
relieved ofthe responsibility for executing the work in accordance with contract documents even though
such shop drawings have been reviewed.
K. All shop drawings shall be submitted to permit Owner's Representative ample time to review before
material is released for delivery to job.
L. Contractor shall maintain a permanent file of shop drawings to turn over to Owner's Representative at
completion of project.
M. Submitals shall include ll4" = 1'-0" dimensioned drawings of all electrical equipment rooms for review
before installation continues.
N. Coordination and Record Drawings:
l. In addition to the preparation and submittal of shop drawings and product data for manufactured
electrical equipment and materials, prepare and maintain in current status, a complete set of
detailed, completely circuited, and dimensioned electrical record drawings for electrical work
included under the Contract.
ARCON 15095 260010‐2 BAS:C ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
0.
2. In addition to the floor and ceiling plans, layouts of all functionally critical areas and congested
areas, such as mechanical and electrical equipment rooms. shall be drawn at a minimum scale of
l/4" equals l'-0" with all details of construction shown.
3. Record drawings shall be made underthe direction and supervision ofthe Contractor and shall
show all electrical work inclusive of conduit, wiring, electrical equipment and devices, lighting
fixture locations and elevations, points where conduit enters or leaves structural slabs and walls,
junction boxes, conduit supports and inserts. The complete electrical distribution system from
source or sources up to and including each branch circuit panelboard shall be shown and
dimensioned exactly as installed, with all feeders located on plan. Major equipment and apparatus
shall be shown to scale and properly located. Drawings shall also show locations and depths of
underground conduits and ducts and their terminations, as installed.
4. Coordination drawings shall be made on 3 mil mylar sheets or CAD drawing compatible with
AutoCAD Version 14.0 of the same size and with the same border lines and title blocks as the
Architect/Engineer's Drawings, with the Contractor's name added.
5. Coordinate electrical work with the work of other trades and in preparing the record drawings,
check the work of other trades in order to avoid possible installation conflicts arising therefrom. In
the event ofconflicts ofinterferences that cannot be resolved in the field, request a written
clarification from the Architect/Engineer.
6. Record drawings shall indicate the electrical installation exactly as constructed and shall be
periodically revised to reflect all changes, including those required by the Architect/Engineer, those
which are or have been found necessary in the field and those which may be suggested by the
Contractor and accepted by the Architect/Engineer. Drawings shall be revised when considered
necessary the the Architect/Engineer or the Contractor in order to facilitate proper coordination.
7. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, the drawings are in acceptable condition after each has
been finally revised, they may be submitted as the field record drawings.
Equipment Drawings:
I . Provide complete set of shop drawings bound in permanent binder.
2. Provide typewritten list of each type, quantity and manufacturer of lamp installed.
3. Provide typewritten list of each type, quantity, size and manufacturer of fuse, motor overload
heater, etc., installed.
4. Provide a complete list of all replaceable components for maintenance purposes.
Maintenance and Operating Manuals
l. Maintenance and Operation Manual, submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the
technical sections. Fumish five (5) copies, bound in hardback binders, manufacturer's standard
binders or an approved equivalent. Fumish one complete manual as specified in the technical
section, but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment te st, and furnish the
remaining manuals prior to contract completion.
2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the works 'MAINTENANCE AND
OPERATION MANUAL", the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of
Contractor and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses and telephone
numbers ofeach subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for
the system or equipment.
3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab
sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily
read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.
4. The manual shall include:
a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed
operation and control of the equipment.
b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation and shutdown.
c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
d. Installationandmaintenanceinstructions.
e. Safety precautions.
f. Diagrams and illustrations.
P.
ARCON 15095 260010‐ 3 BAS:C ELECTR:CAL REQUIREMENTS
g. Testing methods.
h. Performance data.
i. Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range and fiequency.j. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of
special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare
parts and name of servicing organization.
k. Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment,
including addresses and certified qualifications.
A. POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
l. Fumish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical
sections for use by operation personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring diagrams,
control diagrams and controls sequence for each principal system and equipment. Print or engrave
operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions
were directed. Attach or post operating instructions adjacent to each principal system and
equipment including start-up, operating, shutdown, safety precautions and procedure in the event of
equipment failure. Provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures for operating
instructions exposed to the weather. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight
and shall be secured to prevent easy removal.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
The work shall be performed in accordance with codes, laws, and ordinances of Federal, State and local
governing bodies having jurisdiction.
In case ofdifferences between building codes, Federal and State laws, local ordinaces and utility
company regulations and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern.
Fire Alarm: Conform to the latest edition of MPA 72 (National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code)
Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
Obtain permits and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
Obtain approvals, where required, from inspection authorities for exit, emergency lighting, fire alarm
device locations, and other electrical installations requiring specific approval. Prints ofthe Electrical
Drawings, for this purpose, will be furnished by the Architect on request. Required wiring diagrams shall
be provided and submitted for approval by the Contractor. Copies of the final approved drawings shall
be delivered to the Architect. Approvals shall be obtained before commencement of related work.
Pay all fees, and other charges incident to electrical work and obtain and pay for required insurance,
permits, licenses, and inspections. Arrange for all required inspections and deliver certificates and
approval for same to the Architect, as a requirement for final payment.
1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
The drawings fumished in the bid set are to give the general intent of the mechanical and electrical
requirements. All information for installation is not shown and is not fully coordinated with Architectural
and Mechanical drawing and specifications. They are not intended as final installation drawings,
although they may be used as a guide if the Contractor feels that sufficient information for installation is
shown. Installation must be fully coordinated with all trades. If it is necessary to clari! or provide more
detail than is shown, this Contractor shall prepare drawings and submit the same for review and comment.
Carefully examine the contract documents, visit the site, and thoroughly become familiar with the local
conditions relating to the work. Failure to do so will not relieve the contractor of the Contract.
Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
Prepare drawings showing proposed rearangement of Work to meet Project Conditions, including
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
A.
B.
C.
D.
changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
I.O7 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS
A. Before ordering any materials or proceeding with the work, this Contractor shall verifu all measurements
at the site and be responsible for correctness of same. No extra compensation will be allowed because of
ARCON 15095 260010‐4BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENttS
difference between the actual measurements and dimensions indicated on the drawings. Any difference
which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect's Superintendent on the job for rectification
before proceeding with the work.
Contractor and/or manufacturer shall verifr that the capacity and duty specified meets the characteristics
of the equipment he submits for review.
If equipment is submitted for review and does not meet the physical size or arrangement of what was
scheduled and specified, Contractor shall pay for all alternations required to accommodate such
equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall also pay all costs for additional work
required by other Contractors, Owner, Architect or Engineer to make changes which would allow the
equipment to fit the space.
1.08 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND OPENINGS
A. Contractor shall field veriff the size of existing openings, windows, doors, corridors, rooms, etc. for
access of the new equipment into the existing building. If openings are too small for access, then
Contractor shall provide new or enlarged openings, at his own expense, to facilitate entrance into existing
space or building. Contractor may elect to order the equipment disassembled and/or with split housing
for entrance into the existing space or building. Contractor shall reassemble equipment after it is in the
space at his own expense.
I.O9 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS
A. Provide on-site assistance in testing and verification of systems for this project to meet occupancy
conditions.
B. Provide up to three on-site assistance visits within one year of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Proposal shall be based upon the furnishing of all materials and equipment as specified, which in every
case shall be new and, where not specifically referred to by manufacturer's name, ofthe best grade and
quality available.
Materials used through this installation shall be new (without blemish or defect) and the best of their
respective kind and the same shall be installed in a neat, accurate, and workmanlike manner, and in a
manner to permit the work of other trades to also be installed wherever the work covered by this
specification meets with, or must be considered, in connection with the work of other trades working on
this installation. Equipment shall not be used for temporary light and power purposes, including lamps.
This workmanship and these materials must be executed and furnished in a manner entirely satisfactory to
the Owner's Representative.
Items of equipment of within a specificy category type (such as fuses, conduit, electrical distribution
equipment Idistribution switchboards, panelboards, motor starters, enclosed switches] wiring systems),
shall be the product ofone manufacturer throughout, unless otherwise indicated or accepted by the
Architect/Engineer.
Where two types of similar equipment are specified or shown on the drawings, the Base Bid will be based
on the higher quality or greater number. All work shown on the drawings & specifications will be
adjusted to comply with all sections of the Local Codes.
Wherever in the specifications, a particular article or material is definitely mentioned, it shall be provided
and no substitutions shall be allowed, especially insofar as the submittal of the base bid is concerned.
Should this Contractor desire to substitute other materials for those specified, he may submit these
substitutions in the form ofvoluntary alternates to the base bid, designating appropriate additions or
deductions for each alternate. Should no alternates be submitted, the contract shall be entered into on the
basis of the specified base bid equipment. Final review of equipment shall be by the Owner's
Representative. Voluntary alternates will only be recognized at the time of bid.
A specification item followed by one ( I ) or more manufacturers; names of other manufacturers may be
submitted for review to the Owner's Representative a minimum of seven (7) days prior to receiving bids.
Acceptance will be granted only ifissued by addendum (no exceptions).
B.
C.AB.CD.EF.
ARCON 15095 260010‐5BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
G. A specification item followed by one ( I ) or more manufacturers and "or equal" is open to all equal
products or materials. However, Contractor shall supply one (l) of the listed manufacturers at no
additional cost if Owner's Representative determines substituted product unsatisfactory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Receive, handle, and store electrical items and materials at the project site. Materials and electrical items
shall be so placed that they are protected from damage and deterioration. Damaged or othjerwise
unsuitable materials and electrical items shall be immediately removed from the site.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. The Drawings for work under Divisions 26,27 & 28 are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the
scope ofwork and indicate the general arrangement ofconduit, boxes, equipment, devices, fixtures and
other work included in the Contract.
B. Location of items required by the Drawings or specifications not fixed by dimensions are approximate
only and exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and results shall be determined at the site
and shall be subject to the approval ofthe Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
exacUfinal location and coordination ofall devices and in case any devices are not installed in correct
location, Contractor shall move same including all necessary cutting and patching at Contractor's
expense.
C. Owner reseryes right to change position of anylall devices or fixtures within l0'-0" radius before work is
installed without extra charge.
D. Check with Heating Contractor as to location of radiation, Ventilation Contractor as to location of ducts
and grilles, and Plumbing Contractor as to location of piping before installing the work.
E. Contractor shall consult with the Architect and review the plans to verifr the exact locations of all outlets
and mounting heights to insure that all outlets are above counters where cabinet work and/or furniture
occurs and switches are at the correct side of door swings.
F. This Contractor shall consult with the Equipment Suppliers for the correct sizes of all outlets in sufficient
time before wall construction.
G. Follow drawings in layout out work, check drawings of other trades to verifu spaces in which work will
be installed, and maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points.
H. Where headroom or space conditions app€ar inadequate, the Architect/Engineer shall be notified before
proceeding with installation.
I. Minor conduit rerouting and changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
J. Whenever it becomes necessary for the complete fulfillment of this specification to furnish labor or
materials, other than that which is generally accepted by trade agreement or general practice to belong to
his particular trade or branch of work, he shall sublet such work or shall employ workmen regularly
employed, to the end that there will be no delay or stoppage of work due to infringement or alleged
infringement of trade agreements as to jurisdiction.
K. Perform all work with skilled mechanics of the particular trade involved in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
L. Furnish other trades advance information on locations and sizes of frames, boxes, sleeves and openings
needed for the work, and also furnish information and shop drawings necessary to permit trades affected
to install their work properly and without delay.
M. Where there is evidence that work of one trade will interfere with the work of other trades, all trades shall
assist in working out space allocations to make satisfactory adjustments and shall be prepared to submit
and revise coordinate shop drawings.
N. With the approval of the Architect/Engineer and without additional cost to the Owner, make minor
modifications in the work as required by structural interferences, by interferences with work of other
trades or for proper execution ofthe work.
ARCON 15095 260010-6 BAS:C ELECTR!CAL REQUIREMENTS
O. Work installed before coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such
other trades shall be changed to correct such condition without additional cost to the Owner and as
directed by the Architect/Engineer.
P. Equipment shall be installed with adequate space allowed for removal, repair or changes to equipment.
Ready accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided without moving
other equipment which is to be installed or which is in place. Electrical Contractor shall veri$
measurements. Discrepancies shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer's attention for interpretation.
a. Determine temporary openings in the buildings that will be required for the admission of apparatus
furnished under this Division, and notifo the Architect/Engineer accordingly. In the event of failure to
give sufficient notice in time to arrange for these openings during construction, assume all costs of
providing such openings thereaft er.
R. Location of electrical outlets, lighting panels, cabinets, equipment, etc. is approximate and exact locations
shall be determined at the project.
S. Electrical Contractor shall refer to contract documents for details, reflected ceiling plans, and large scale
drawings.
T. Equipment shall be installed with ample space allowed for its removal for repairs or changes. Ready
accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided so that other equipment, in
place or to be installed, need not be moved at any time.
U. Sufiicient access for the installation of electrical equipment shall be determined prior to delivery.
V. Compare all contract drawings and specifications to determine the intent of the two together. In case of
any discrepancy between the drawings and specifications, the matter shall be referred to the Owner's
Representative before any work is installed. The interpretation of the intent shall rest solely with the
Owner's Representative, and his decision shall be considered final.
W. Any changes of the electrical layout necessary to make the work conform to the entire facility as
construction, fit the work ofother trades or conform to the rules ofthe city and state and/or other
regulating bodies (Public Health, NFPA, etc.), shall be made without additional cost.
X. Omission in the contract drawings and/or specifications of any items necessary for the proper completion
or operation of the work outlined in this specification shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing
same without additional cost.
Y. WORK BY OT}IERS
l. Except as otherwise noted or specified, this Contractor shall not include the following apparatus
which shall be provided under other contracts: Electric motors will be set on foundation by others,
but shall be wired by this Contractor.
2. All apparatus furnished by others to this Contractor shall be carefully protected, neatly connected,
and shall be put in first class condition at time it is submitted for acceptance. The Contractor shall
receive all equipment, sign for same and be responsible for its safety.
3. This Contractor shall coordinate with controls Contractor to ensure that all starters and equipment
are the proper type, have proper interlocks, holding coils, voltage, etc.. This Contractor will check
starter overloads with actual motor full load current nameplate rating.
a. Motors with a marked service factor not less than I .l 5 or marked with a temperature rise not
over 40degrees C. shall be set at 125%o.
b. All other motors shall be set at I 157o.
4. Temperature controls wiring and conduit will be furnished and installed under Heating Contract.
5. Conhol wiring for all plumbing motors, hot water circulating pumps, domestic hot water
recirculating pumps, sump pumps, sewage ejector, etc., will be installed and wired by the Electrical
Contractor.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect conduit and wireway openings against the entrance of foreign matter by means of plugs or caps.
Cover fixtures, materials, equipment and devices or otherwise protect against damage from any cause,
ARCON 15095 260010-7 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQU:REMENttS
3.04
3.05
both before and after installation. Fixtures, materials, equipment, or condition or replaced, all at no
additional cost to Owner.
B. Equipment shall be inherently safe and moving parts shall be covered with guards.
COOPERATION
A. Where jurisdictional rules require the assistance of electrical mechanics in the moving and setting of
electrically powered equipment, provide such assistance.
B. Where work covered by this section connects to equipment furnished under other sections, verifo
electrical work involved in the field and make proper connection to such equipment.
F'INAL COMPLETION
A. Work shall be cleaned prior to the date of "substantial completion" as determined by the Owner's
Representative.
B. Clean equipment, restore all damaged materials, remove grease, oil, chemicals, paint spots and/or stains,
etc., and generally leave the work in A-l condition.
C. Retouch and/or repaint all factory painted prime and/or finish coats where scratched or damaged.
Wherever retouching will not be satisfactory, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, the Owner's
Representative had the option to require complete repainting until the desired appearance is obtained.
D. Lamps, fixtures, lenses, reflectors, etc., shall be cleaned and not sooner than ten (10) days prior to date of
substantial completion.
E. Remove from site all tools, equipment, surplus materials, and rubbish pertaining to contract work and
include all costs for such removal and disposition. All rubbish left will be removed by Owner and
services for same shall be back-charged to Contractor against final payout on contract.
DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLETED SYSTEMS
A. Where not specifically described elsewhere within this electrical specification section, provide owner
with a demonstraton of all complete systems as follows:
L Demonstrate to the Onwer's Representative, the essential features of all electrical systems specified.
2. Show by start/stop operation, etc., the manner of control, resetting of protective devices and the
replacement of fuses, etc.
3. Demonstrate area lighting and show the location of panelboards, dimmers, time switches and
setting, etc.
4. Demonstrate all required maintenance functions.
5. In addition to training specified in othe sections herein, Include a total of 8 hours for demonstration
of basic electrical systems. Hours and arrangement to be scheduled by Owner's Representative.
TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
A. Verifi motors for proper rotation prior to operation.
B. Test all motor controls for proper operations.
C. Test all duplex receptacles for proper polarity and grounding.
D. Measure, load, and record readings on all feeders, motors, transformers and panelboards, etc. Reconnect
panelboard loads as may be necessary to obtain a reasonable balance ofloads on all phases. Variation
shall not exceed l0% phase to phase.
E. Provide three (3) typewritten copies ofthe recordings in bound booklets prior to request for final
payment.
F. Demonstrate by tests, at the request of the Owner's Representative, the compliance of the installation with
these specifications, the drawings, the National Electric Code, and the accepted standards of good
workmanship. These tests shall include operation of lights and equipment, continuity of the conduit
system, grounding resistances, and insulation resistances on not more than ten (10) representative circuits
and any other circuits for which a justifiable reason exists for such tests. All labor and testing equipment
for the performance of these tests shall be furnished by the Contractor.
3.07
ARCON 15095 260010-8 BAS!C ELECTR!CAL REQUIREMENTS
3.06
3.08 GUARANTEE
A. Where not specifically described elsewhere within this electrical specification section, the complete
electrical system as indicated on the drawings and in these specifications shall be guaranteed by this
Contractor for one (l) year from date offinal acceptance by the Architect against defective material and
workmanship. Defective workmanship and material developing during the guarantee period shall be
repaired or replaced by this Contractor without cost to the Owner.
B. Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner or Architect of failure of any part of the guaranteed
materials or equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be repaired or replaced
with new, by and at the expense of the Electrical Contractor.
C. Make all service calls, replacements, repairs and adjustments during the guarantee period without cost to
Owner.
f,ND OF SECTION 260010
ARCON 15095 260010‐9 BAS:C ELECTRiCAL REQU:REMENTS
SECTION 260519
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single conductor building wire.
B. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.
C. Wiring connectors.
D. Electrical tape.
E. Heat shrink tubing.
F. Wire pulling lubricant.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM 83 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 20 I 3.
B. ASTM 88 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
Medium-Hard, or Soft; 201 l.
C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical
Purposes; 2010 (Reapproved 2014).
D. ASTM 8787/8787M - Standard Specification for l9 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper
Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2014).
E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperaturo Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic
Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 20 I 0.
F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically Insulating
Rubber Tapes; 20 I 3.
G. NECA I - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
H. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); National
Electrical Contractors Association; 20 I 2 (NECANACMA I 02).
I. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy;
National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSINEMA WC T0ICEA 3-95-658).
J. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSINETA ATS).
K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
L. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180
M. UL 4 - Armored Cable; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
N. W 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Cunent Edition, Including All Revisions.
O. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
a. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
R. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
S. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
ARCON 15095 260519‐1BUILD!NG W!RE AND CABLE
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
l. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with
the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for
voltage drop.
2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable
for use with the conductors to be installed.
3. Notift Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.
I.O5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
I.O7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than l4
degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this
temperature is unavoidable, notifu Engineer and obtain direction before proceeding with work.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.
B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,
permitted, or required.
C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.
D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted.
E. Service entrance cable is not permitted.
F. Armored cable is permitted only as follows:
l. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to
luminaires.
l) Maximum Length: 6 feet.
2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:
a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.
b. Where exposed to damage.
c. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations.
G. Metal-clad cable is not permitted.
2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Southwire Co.
B. Triangle Wire and Cable.
ARCON 15095 260519‐2BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
2.03 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable forthe purpose intended.
C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc.
as required for a complete operating system.
D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.
E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.
F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
G. Conductor Material:
l. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project.
Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.
2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors
complying with ASTM 83, ASTM 88, or ASTM B787lB 787M unless otherwise indicated.
3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.
H. Minimum Conductor Size:
l. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
a. Exceptions:
I ) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 7 5 feet: I 0 AWG, for voltage drop.
2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.
3) 20 A,277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: l0 AWG, for voltage drop.
I. Conductor Color Coding:
l. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority havingjurisdiction.
Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.
3. Color Code:
a. 480Y1277 V, 3 Phase,4 Wire System:
I ) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.
b. 208Y1120 V, 3 Phase,4 Wire System:
l) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
4) Neutral/Grounded: White.
c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
d. Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe.
e. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink'
f. For modifrcations or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color code
when existing code complies with I.IFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having
jurisdiction.
2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIR"E
A. Manufacturers:
l. Copper Building Wire:
a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.
b. EncoreWireCorporation: www.encorewire.com.
c. SouthwireCompany: www.southwire.com.
B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
C. ConductorStranding:
ARCON 15095 260519-3 BUILDING W:RE AND CABLE
l. Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a. Size l0 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
E. Insulation:
l. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below.
a. Installed Exterior or Underground: Type XHHW-2.
F. Conductor: Copper.
G. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
2.05 ARMORED CABLE
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type AC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 4, and listed for use in
classified firestop systems to be used.
B. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
C. Insulation: Type THHN.
D. Grounding: Combination of interlocking annor and integral bonding wire.
E. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.
2.06 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be
connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-4868 or UL 486C as applicable.
B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:
l. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.
2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression
connectors.
C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression
connectors where connectors are required.
D. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302
degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D
for damp and wet locations.
E. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.
F. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.
2.07 WIRINGACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Tape:
l. Manufacturers:
a. 3M: www.3m.com.
b. Plymouth RubberEuropa: www.plymouthrubber.com.
2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL
5 l0; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for
application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221
degrees F.
3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying with ASTM
D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 194
degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service.
4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125 mil;
suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.
5. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all-weather
vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.
ARCON 15095 260519‐4BU:LD:NG WIRE AND CABLE
B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for
direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.
C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable
for use at the installation temperature.
D. Use mechanical compression for 6 AWG or larger or any connection made within any type of exterior
junction box or device to include. Cover connector with insulating tape or heat shrinkable insulation
equivalent to 150o/o conductor insulation.
E. Outdoor boxes (Including building mounted boxes used for outdoor devices) and undergroud connections
of any type #12 to #6 AWG.
l. Ideal Weatherproof wire connectors or equal.
a. Silicon filled wire connectors designed to meet UL 486D standards
b. Size per manufacturer for number and wire sizes
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verif that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verifi that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C. Verif that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to
accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.
D. Verifr that raceway installation is complete and supported.
E. Verif that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. CircuitingRequirements:
l. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.
3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.
4. Maintain separation of Class l, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited
circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.
5. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.
6. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are shown as separate,
combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.
7. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up
to three single phase branch circuits ofdiflerent phases installed in the same raceway is not
permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.
8. Provide oversized neutral/grounded conductors where indicated and as specified below.
a. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders fed from K-rated transformers.
b. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders serving panelboards with 200 percent rated
neutral bus.
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
D. Install armored cable (Type AC) in accordance with NECA 120.
E. Installation in Raceway:
I . Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants.
2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.
ARCON 15095 260519-5 BU:LD:NG WIRE AND CABLE
3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling
tension and sidewall pressure.
4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by
lhe manufacturer.
F. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors ofthe same length and terminate in the same manner.
G. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and
methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building
structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.
I . Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support fiom ceiling support system. Do
not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles.
2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds permissible limits.
H. Terminate cables using suitable fittirgs.
L Armored Cable (T)?e AC):
a. Use listed fittings and anti-short, insulating bushings.
b. Cut cabl€ armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do
not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cul armor.
I. Install conductors with a minimum of l2 inches ofslack at each outlet.
J. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wirerrys, panelboards and other equipment enclosures.
K. Group or otherwise identifu neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside
enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.
L. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
l. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or rnake spliccs in
conduit bodies or wiring gutters.
2. Remove appropriate amount ofconductor insulation for making connections without cutting.
nicking or damaging conductors.
3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and conneclors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and
other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.
5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure conneclions according to manufacturer's recommended torque
settings.
6. Compression Conn€ctors: Secure connections using manufacfurer's recommended tools and dies.
M. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the
application. with insulation and mechanical strength at Ieast equivalent to unspliced conductors.
l. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or
heat shrink tubing.
a. For taped connections, firsl apply adequate amount ofrubber splicing electrical tape or
electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering ofvinyl insulating electrical tape.
2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical lape, or
heat shrink tubing.
a. For connections with insulating covers, apply ouler covering ofmoisture sealing electrical
tape.
b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering of
moisture sealing electrical tape.
3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.
N. Insulate ends ofspare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
O. Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifring color code for ungrounded conductors at
each piece offeeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch
circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.
P. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance mting ofparitions and other elements, using materials and
methods as required.
ARCON 15095 260519-6 BUILDING VVIRE AND CABLE
a. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices,
including those fumished by others, as required for a complete operating system.
R. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA l.
S. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.
l. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and
lengths required.
3. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within l0 ft of location
shown.
T. Use wiring methods indicated.
U. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
V. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
W. Protect exposed cable from damage.
X. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
Y. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
Z. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature
rise.
AA. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 260553. Identifu each conductor with
its circuit number or other designation indicated.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7 .3.2. The insulation resistance test is
required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.
D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.
E. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2.
END OF SECTION 260519
ARCON 15095 260519‐7BUILD:NG VVIRE AND CABLE
SECT10N 260529
CUTTING,PATCHING,SLEEVES,HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PARTl GENERAL
l.01 GENERAL CONDIT10NS
A. Equipment shaH not be held in place by its own dead weight. Base anchor fasteners sha∥be provided in
each case.
B. AH cutting and patching ofnew and/or existing surfaces w∥l be the responsibility ofthe Electrical
Contractor.Surfaces wili be restored to its original condition and will be to the satisfaction ofthe Owner
and the Architect.All patching wiH be by tradesmen■omaHy employed by each specialty and win be
paid by the Electrical Contractor.
C Contractor shall give the Architect complete inforlnation as to size ofopenings in noors,walls,etc.,so
that such openings inay be provided as the building pЮ gresses.
D. Ifopenings are omitted or incorect through failure to foHow above instructions,the Contractor shaH
cngage the Contractor for general flnishes construction to cut and patch at his own expense to the
satisfaction ofthe Architect.
1.02 SECT10N INCLUDES
A. Support and attachment components for equipment,conduit,cable,boxes,and other electrical work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A123/A123M‐Standard Speciflcation for Zinc(Hot‐Dip Galvanized)COatings on lron and Steel
Products;2013.
B.ASTM A153/A153M‐Standard Specincation for Zinc Coating(Hot‐Dip)on IЮ n and Steel Hardware;
2009.
C. ASTM B633‐Standard Speciflcation for Electrodeposited Coatings ofZinc on lron and Steel;2013.
D. NIFMA‐4‐Metal Framing Standards Publication;Metal Fralning Manufacturers Association;2004.
E. ICC‐ES AC01‐Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements;2009.
F. ICC‐ES AC106‐Acceptance Criteria for PredHlled Fasteners(SCrew Anchors)in MaSOmy Elements;
2006
G. ICC‐ES AC193‐Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements;2010
H. ICC‐ES AC308‐Acceptance Criteria for Post‐Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements;2009.
I. NECA l…Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction;National Elecmcal cOntractors
Association;2010.
J. NFPA 70‐National Electrical Code;National Fire Protection Association;Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORT AND Aπ ACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.General Requirements:
1. Provide a∥required hangers,supports,anchors,fasteners,flttings,accessories,and hardware as
necessary lor the complete instanation ofelectrical work.
2. Provide products listed,classifled,and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended,where
appHcable.
3. Where support and attachment componenttypes and sizes are not indicated,select in accordance
with manufacturers application criteria as required for the load to be supported wlth a minilnum
safety factor of______・ InClude consideration for vibration,cquipment operation,and shock loads
where applicable.
4. Do not use products for applications otherthan as pemitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.
ARCON 15095
AND SUPPORttS
260529-l CUTT:NG,PATCHING,SLEEVES,HANGERS
5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed.
a. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM 8633.
b. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
Al23lAl23M or ASTM Al53/Al53M.
B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported.
L Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.
C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.
D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and
associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly ofsupports.
l. Comply with MFMA-4.
E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
F. Anchors and Fasteners:
l. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise reshicted, use the anchor and fastener R?es
indicated for the specified applications.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Expansive screw anchors, shields, or other fastening items containing lead or other material that might
loosen or melt under fire conditions shall not be used. No items shall rest on or depend for support on
suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath, plaster, splines, etc.).
B. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type
adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.
C. Sleeves for conduits shall be mild steel tube, galvanized inside and outside, equal to rigid conduit.
D. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized angles or channels
supported with 3/8" threaded rods anchored to the building construction. Any necessary Unistrut and/or
steel to span construction members will be furnished and installed.
E. Anchors and Fasteners:
l. Do not use powder-actuated anchors, spring clips, or beam clamps.
2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, or preset inserts.
3. Steel Structural Elements: Usebeamclamps,steel springclips,steel ramsetfasteners,orwelded
fasteners.
4. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors.
5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners.
6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.
7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
F. Formed Steel Channel:
l. Product: Unistrut
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA
l.
C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or
oth€r systems.
D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer, do not provide support from suspended ceiling
support system or ceiling grid.
E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer, do not provide support from roofdeck.
ARCON 15095 260529 - 2 CUTTING, PATCHING, SLEEVES, HANGERS
AND SUPPORTS
F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer.
G. Equipment Support and Attachment:
l. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support
equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud
walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to
provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own
weight for support.
H. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
I. Remove temporary supports.
END OF SECTION 260529
ARCON 15095 260529‐3 CUttT:NG,PAttCH!NG,SLEEVES,HANGERSAND SUPPORTS
SECT10N 2`0534
CONDUIT
PART l GENERAL
l.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Calvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC).
B.Aluminum rigid metal conduit(RMC).
C.Intermediate metal conduit(IMC).
D. PVC¨coated galvanized steel rigid nletal conduit(RMC).
E.Flexible metal conduit(FMC).
Fo Liquidtight flexible metal conduit(LFMC).
G.Electrical metallic tubing(EMT).
H.Rigid polyvinyi chloride(PVC)COnduit.
I. Conduit flttings.
J. Accessories.
K. Conduit,■ttings and conduit bodies.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 033000‐Cast‐in‐Place Concretei Concrete encasement ofconduits.
B. Section 260526‐Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 260529‐CUTTING,PATCHING,SLEEVES,臥 NGERS AND SUPPORTS.
D. Section 260553‐Identiflcation for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 260537‐Boxes.
F. Section 260553‐Identiflcation for Electrical Systems: Identiflcation products and requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ANSI C80.1‐AmeHcan National Standard for ElectHcal Rigid Steel Conduit(ERSC);2005.
B.ANSI C80.3‐Amencan National Standard for Steel Electrical Mctallic Tubing(EMT);2005.
C.ANSI C80.5…Amencan National Standard for ElectHcal Rigid Aluminum Conduit(ERAC);2005.
Do ANSI C80.6‐Amencan National Standard for ElectHcal lnterlnediate Metal Conduit(EIMCヽ 2005.
E. hlECA l‐Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction;National Electrical Contractors
Association;2010.
F.NECA 101‐Standard for lnstalling Steel Conduits(Rigid,IMC,EMTヽ National Electrical Contractors
Association:2013.
G.hlECA 102‐Standard for lnstalling A:uminum Rigid Metal Conduit;National Electrical Contractors
Association;2004.
H.NECA lH‐Standard for lnstalling Nonmetallic Raceways(RNC,ENT,LFNC);National EIcctrical
Contractors Association;2003.
Io NEル υヽFB l‐Fittings,Cast Metal Boxes,and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,Electrical Metanic Tubing,
and Cable;National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2012(ANS1/NENIA FB l).
J. NEMA RNl‐Polyvinyl‐Chloride(PVC)Extemally Coated Calvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
lnterlnediate Metal Conduit;National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2005.
K.NEMA TC2‐Electrical PolyvinyI Chloride(PVC)COnduit:National Electrical Manufacturers
Association;2013.
L.NEMA TC3…Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;National
Electrical Manufacturers Association;2015.
ARCON 15095 260534‐1CONDU:T
M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
N. tll- I - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O. LIL 6 - ElectricalRigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P. UL 64 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
a. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
R. UL 5l48 - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
S. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
T. IJL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
U. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Cunent Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. All building wiring shall be routed in approved metallic raceway (conduit) unless otherwise specifically
noted.
B. All conduit shall be routed concealed (above lay-in ceiling, within walls, below grade or slab, etc.) within
all finished spaces unless otherwise noted.
I.O5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit,
metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, nonmetallic tubing, fittings, and
conduit bodies.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
I.O1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance ofdebris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate
covering.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI CONDUITAPPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by MPA 70 and
product listing.
B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the
specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive
requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid
metal conduit.
C. Underground:
l. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit'
3. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
ARCON 15095 260534-2 CONDUIT
4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit
where emerging from underground.
5. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use
galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.
6. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide
supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit
emerges or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
D. Embedded Within Concrete:
L Within Slab on Grade (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural Engineer): Use
galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
2. Within Slab Above Ground (within structural slabs only where approved by Stmctural Engineer):
Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
K. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
L. Corrosive Locations Above Ground: Use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or aluminum
rigid metal conduit.
l. Corrosive locations include, but are not limited to:
a. Cooling towers.
b. Pools and pool equipment rooms
M. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.
l. Maximum Length: 6 feet.
N. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:
l. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.
4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:
a. Transformers.
b. Motors.
c. Generators
O. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.
2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they
comply with specified requirements, are fiee from corrosion, and integrity is verified by pulling a mandrel
through them.
B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.
C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
l. Branch Circuits: ll2 inch ( 16 mm) trade size.
2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 314 inch (21 mm) trade size.
3. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size.
E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum
size requirements specifi ed.
ARCON 15095 260534‐ 3 CONDU:T
2.03 ALUMTNUM RrGrD METALCONDUTT(RMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5 and listed
and labeled as complying with UL 6.4.
B. Fittings:
l. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use aluminum.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fiuings only. Threadless set screw and compression
(gland) type fittings are not permitted.
2.04 TNTERMEDTATE METAL CONDUTT (IMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI
C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying withUL 1242.
B. Fittings:
l. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression
(gland) type fittings are not permitted.
2.05 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Manufacturers:
l. Robroy Industries; _: www.robroy.com.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN I and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.
C. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil.
D. PVC-CoatedFittings:
l. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.
2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with LIL 5148.
3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil.
E. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of
l5 mil.
2.06 FLEXTBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A. Manufacturers as described above.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as
complying with UL l, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.
C. Fittings:
l. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with UL
5148.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
D. Description: Interlockedsteelconstruction.
E. Fittings: NEMA FB L
2,07 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A. Manufacturers as described above.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steelflexible metal conduit listed
and labeled as complying with UL 360.
C. Fittings:
ARCON 15095 260534‐4CONDUI丁
l. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with LIL
5148.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
D. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
E. Fittings: NEMAFB l.
2.08 ELECTRTCAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers as described above.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed
and labeled as complying with UL 797.
C. Fittings:
l. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with tll-
5148.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) type.
a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
D. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB l; steel compression type. Steel set screw qpe shall be used
for conduit runs withing block walls.
2.09 RrGrD POLWTNYL CHLORTDE (PVC) CONDUTT
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and
listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated; rated for use with
conductors rated 90 degrees C.
B. Fittings:
l. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL
65 l; material to match conduit.
2.IO ACCESSORIES
A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.
B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit
to be installed.
C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings
to be installed.
D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.
E. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed.
F. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the conduits to be
installed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verifr that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B. Verifr that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.
C. Verifo that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
D. Verifi routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
E. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to
complete wiring system.
ARCON 15095 260534-5 CONDU:T
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA l.
C. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102.
D. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
E. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the
manufacturer.
F. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA I I l.
G. Conduit Routing:
l. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.
2. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.
3. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Electrical rooms.
b. Mechanical equipment rooms.
c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
4. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:
a. Across roofs.
b. Across top of parapet walls.
c. Across building exterior surfaces.
5. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible
manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building
structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.
6. Anange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.
7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends between pull
Points.
8. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.
9. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings
where moisture may collect.
10. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.
I 1. Maintain minimum clearance of l2 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is
not limited to:
a. Heaters.
b. Hot water piping.
c. Flues.
12. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.
H. Conduit Support:
l. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section260529 using suitable
supports and methods approved by the authority havingjurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do
not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.
I. Connections and Terminations:
l. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduitjoint compound on field-cut threads ofgalvanized steel
conduits prior to making connections.
2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings
or split couplings. Do not use running threads.
3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.
4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into
connectors.
ARCON 15095 260534‐6CONDUIT
5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for
dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure,
provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor.
7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors.
8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and elechical continuity.
J. Penetrations:
1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams,
without approval of Structural Engineer.
2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves
flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
5. Seal interior ofconduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent
entry of moisfure and gases.
6. Provide suitable modular seal where conduits penetrate exterior wall below grade.
7 . Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of
membrane.
8. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs
where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as
indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include
proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.
9. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view.
10. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating ofpartitions and other elements, using materials
and methods specified in Section 078400.
K. Undergroundlnstallation:
l. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 260553 along entire conduit length
for service entrance where not concrete-encased.
L. Embedment Within Structural Concrete Slabs (only where approved by Stmctural Engineer):
I . Install conduits within middle one third of slab thickness.
2. Secure conduits to prevent floating or movement during pouring ofconcrete.
M. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be
concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section 033000 with minimum concrete cover of
3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated.
N. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Where conduits cross boundaries of hazardous (classified) locations,
provide sealing fittings located as indicated or in accordance with NFPA 70.
O. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and
expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This
includes, but is not limited to:
l. Where conduits cross structuraljoints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.
2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.
P. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial
temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near
the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:
l. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces'
2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.
a. provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed
by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.
R. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526-
S. Identiff conduits in accordance with Section 260553.
ARCON 15095 260534-7 CONDUI丁
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized flnishes using zinc‐rich paint recommended by inanufacturer.
Replace components that exhibit signs ofcorroslon.
B.Where coating ofPVC‐coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC)contains cuts or abrasions,
repair in accordance wlth manufactureris instructions.
C. Correct deflciencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.
3.04 CLEANING
A.Clean interior ofconduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.
3.05 1NTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. InstaH conduit to preseerve flre resistance rating ofpartitions and other elements,using materials and
methods specifled wlthin applicable sections ofbuilding speciflcation.
B. Route conduit through roofopenings for piping and ducヽ vork wherever possible. Where separate rooflng
penetration is required,coordinate location and instanation inethod with rooflng instanation..
END OF SECTION 260534
ARCON 15095 260534…8CONDUIT
SECTION 260537
BOXES
PARTl GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used asjunction and pull boxes.
B. Cabinets and enclosures, includingjunction and pull boxes largerthan 100 cubic inches.
I.O2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260529 - CUTTING, PATCHING, SLEEVES, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS.
B. Section 260534 - Conduit:
l. Conduit bodies and other fittings.
2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between
pulling points.
C. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices:
1. Wall plates.
2. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA I - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
C. NEMA FB I - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing,
and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2012 (ANSIA{EMA FB l).
D. NEMA OS I - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSIAIEMA OS I ).
E. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSIAIEMA OS 2).
F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment ( 1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 20 I 4.
G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
I. UL 508 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
J. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
K. UL 5 l4A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
l. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other
potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical
equipment required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of
the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps,
support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.
4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected
conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.
ARCON 15095 260537‐1BOXES
5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under
other sections or by others.
6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.
7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted
boxes where indicated.
8. Notifu Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.
B. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180
I.O5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for outlet and device boxes,
cabinets and enclosures, and floor boxes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes, cabinets and
enclosures, floor boxes, and underground handhole enclosures.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
I.O? DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BoxEs
A. GeneralRequirements:
l. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70
and product listing.
2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to
accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.
3. Provide products listed, classified, and tabeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
minimum size requirements specified.
5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate.
B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes:
L Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.
2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or
required; fumish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.
3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or
exposed intermediate metal conduit (lMC) is used.
4. Use cast aluminum boxes where aluminum rigid metal conduit is used.
5. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.
6. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.
7. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where
required.
8. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.
9. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.
10. Sheet-SteelBoxes: ComplywithNEMAOsl,andlistandlabelascomplyingwithUL5l4A.
ll. CastMetal Boxes: ComplywithNEMAFB l,andlistandlabelascomplyingwithUL5l4A;
furnish with threaded hubs.
ARCON 15095 260537…2BOXES
12. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of
load to be supported; fumished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where
required.
13. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use
fi eld-connected gangable boxes.
14. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 262726.
C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
l. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A.
2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type l, painted steel.
b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R" painted steel.
3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
a. Provide screw-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 GENERAL
A. In general, boxes shall be galvanized, pressed steel, have depth and shape best suited to the intended use,
and contain knockouts ofquantity and size equal to the conduit runs to be connected thereto. All boxes
shall be securely fastened in place and shall provide sufficient support to the purpose intended.
B. Outlet boxes for mounting fixtures shall be equipped with slip-in or boltless fixture studs. Hickey studs
will NOT be acceptable. Installation of the larger fixtures shall be made with hangers to support fixtures
independently of outlet box.
C. Outlet boxes not mounting fixtures and at which no connections are made shall be equipped with steel
cover plates. Although no connections are made in such outlets, sufficient wire shall be provided in each
for making future connection.
D. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be galvanized, octagon, 4" x 7-112" deep without fixture stud, 2-ll8" deep with
fixture stud.
E. Concrete boxes where used shall have a minimum of I " concrete cover.
F. Exterior outlet boxes shall be weather-resistant (rain tight), having appropriate covers fitted with gaskets
and fastened with screws. Boxes shall be Crouse-Hinds series CPS or Series V., as applicable.
G. Switch outlet boxes for local light control switches, convenience outlets, telephone, etc., shall be
galvanized, square 4" x l-112", with raised cover to fit flush with finish wall line. Multiple gang switch
outlets shall consist of the required gang with raised covers. Where outlet boxes occur in exposed
concrete block walls, boxes shall be installed in block cavity with a raised square edge tile cover of
sufficient depth to extend out to face of block. Outlet boxes for special purposes shall be suitable for the
purpose intended as herein specified and shown on the drawings.
H. See drawings for additional information. The above is the minimum specification unless otherwise noted
on the drawings.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verifi that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B. Verifo that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.
C. Verifr that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA I and, where applicable,
NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not
indicated.
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
NFPA 70.
ARCON 15095 260537‐3BOXES
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.
Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.
Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or
permitted.
Box Locations:
l. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.
a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 262726.
2. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.
3. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at
different mounting heights, install along a cornmon vertical center line.
5. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6
inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.
6. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back;
provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation.
7. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance will
not be reduced.
a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum
24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities
or protect both boxes with listed putty pads.
b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such that the total
aggregate area of openings exceeds I 00 square inches for any I 00 square feet of wall area.
8. Locatejunction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation ofconductors, and
to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section
260534.
9. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the
Architect:
a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.
b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
c. Electrical rooms.
d. Mechanical equipment rooms.
Box Supports:
I . Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 260529 using suitable supports
and methods approved by the authority havingjurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes
used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70.
Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.
3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support
system.
Install boxes plumb and level.
Flush-Mounted Boxes:
l. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front
edge ofbox or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than l/4 inch or
does not project beyond finished surface.
2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised
cover is flush with finished surface.
3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum,
plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than l/8 inch at the edge ofthe box.
Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.
Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor.
J.
K.
L.
M.
ARCON 15095 260537‐4BOXES
N. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds
300 v.
O. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods specified in Section 078400.
P. Close unused box openings.
a. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or
designated for future use.
R. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.
S. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations.
I . Adjust box locations up to I 0 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for
installation of conductors.
END OF SECTION 260537
ARCON 15095 260537‐5BOXES
SECTION 260553
1DENTIFICAT10N FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PARTl GENERAL
l.01 SECT10N INCLUDES
A. Identiflcation for Equipment
l. Panelboards
2. Panelboard Schedules
3. Existing Panelboard Schedules
4. Identiflcation iabels
l.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
l.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.■lFPA 70‐National Electrical Code;National Fire Protection Association;Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including A∥Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
B. IAC 180‐IIlinois Administrat市 e Code 180
1.04 ADⅣEINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1, VeH取 Anal designations for equipment,systems,and components to be identined priOr t。
fabrication ofidentiflcation products.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not conceal items to be identifled,in locations such as above suspended ceilings,until
identiflcation products have been instaned.
2. Do not instaH identiflcation products until flnal surface flnishes and painting are complete.
1.05 SUBⅣIITTALS
A. Subnlit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates,labels,and inarkers.
C. Manufacturer's lnstructionsi lndicate application conditions and liinitations ofuse stipulated by product
testing agency. Include instructions for storage,handling,protection,examination,preparation and
instanation ofproduct.
1,06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Confom to requirements ofNFPA 70.
B. Conform to IHinois Administrative Code 180 and an building Codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 1DENTIFICAT10N REQUIREMENTS
A. Identiflcation for Equipment:
1. Use identincatiOn nameplate or identiication label to identi″each piCCe ofelectHcal distribution
and control equipment and associated sections,compartments,and components.
a, Panelboards:
1) USe identincation nalneplate to identitt panelbOard nalne.
2) Use COmputer Generated Directory to identi取 load(S)Served for panelboards with a
door.Identltt spares and spaces.
3) For power panelboards without a door,use identincation.mleplate to identi,10ad(S)
served for each branch device.Idend,spares and spaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturers insmctions.
B. Degreasc and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
ARCON 15095 260553‐1 1DENT:F:CA丁 :ON FOR ELECTR:CAL
SYSTEMS
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and
maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
l. Surface-MountedEquipment: Enclosurefront.
2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.
3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.
4. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.
5. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
6. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point ofaccess.
C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.
D. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and
edges properly sealed.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of
improper adhesion.
B. Panel identification
L Provide identification for each lighting and appliance panelboard with a computer generated
directory accurately indicating rooms and/or equipment being serviced, sealed in plastic and
attached to door interior, etc. Note: Each index shall be sequenced in accord with actual panel
circuiting (i.e. left side - l, 3,5,7, etc., right side - 2,4,6, etc.).
2. Existing panelboards that require circuit modifications and/or additions shall have their circuit
schedule completely replaced. All existing to remain circuits shall be traced to their load as
required and indicated on the circuit schedule.
END OF SECTION 260553
ARCON 15095 260553‐2 !DENT:FICAT:ON FOR ELECTR:CAL
SYSTEMS
SECT10N 262717
EQUIPMENT WIRING
PARTl GENERAL
l.01 SECT10N INCLUDES
A. Electrical connections to equipment.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 260519‐BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE.
B. Section 260534‐Conduit.
C. Section 260537‐Boxes.
D. Section 262726‐Wiring Devices.
E. Section 262818‐Enclosed Switches.
1,03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.IJEⅣ鋏 WDl‐General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices;National ElectHcal Manufacturers
Association;1999(R2010).
B. ■lEMA WD 6‐Wiring Devices‐Dimensional Requirements;National Electrical Manufacturers
Association;2012.
C. 31FPA 70‐National Electrical Code;National Fire Protection Association;Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
D.IAC 180‐11linois Administrat市 e Code 180.
1.04 ADⅣEINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1. Obtain and re宙 ew shop drawings,product data,manufacturers wiHng diagrams,and manufacturers
instructions for equipment fumished under other sections.
2. Detemine connection locations and requirements.
B. Sequencing:
1. InstaH rough‐in ofelectrical connections before instanation ofequipment is required.
2. Makc electrical connections before required start¨up ofequipment.
1.05 SUBⅣIITTALS
A. Submit under prOvisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer's catalog inforlnation showing dilnensions,
conflgurations,and construction.
C. Manufacturer's lnstructionsI Indicate application conditions and lilnitations ofuse stipulated by product
testing agency. Include instructions for storage,handling,protection,examination,preparation,and
instanation ofproduct.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conforln to requirements of■lFPA 70.
B. Confonn to lninois Adnlinistrative Code 180 and an bunding COdes as listed in IAC section 180.60.
C. Products: Listed,classifled,and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
1.07 C00RDINAT10N
A. Obtain and review shop drawings,product data,manufacturers wiring diagralns,and inanufacturer's
instructions for equipment fumished under other sections.
B. Deterlnine connection locations and requirements.
C. Sequence rough‐in ofelectrical connections to coOrdinate with instanation ofequipment.
D. Sequence clectrical connections to coordinate with start‐up ofequipment.
ARCON 15095 262717‐1EQU:PMENT VVIRING
PART2 PRODUCTS
2,OI MATERIALS
A. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 262818 and in individual equipment sections.
B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 262726.
C. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 260534.
D. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 260519.
E. Boxes: As specified in Section 260537.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.
B. Final connections to all motors shall be made with flexible steel conduit. Final connections to roof
exhaust fans shall be made with "sealtite" waterproof flexible conduit. Provide additional ground wire to
assure a perfect ground connection.
C. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with
watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
D. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures
encountered.
E. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
F. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.
G. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment
connection boxes.
H. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment
wiring requirements.
I. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
J. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring
requirements.
K. Coolers and Freezers: Cut and seal conduit openings in fieezer and cooler walls, floor, and ceilings.
L. Seal roof penetrations as recommended by roofing manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 262717
ARCON 15095 262717-2 EQU:PMENT VVIRING
SECTION 2`272`
WIRING DEVICES
PARTl GENERAL
l.01 SECT10N INCLUDES
A. Wa∥swltches.
B. Receptacles.
C. Wall plates.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Ao Section 260537‐Boxes.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS W¨C‐596‐Connector,Electrical,Power,Ceneral Speciflcation for;Federal Speciflcation;Revision
G,2001.
B. FS W¨S‐896‐Switches,Toggle(Toggle and Lock),Flush‐mounted(General Speciflcation);Federal
Speciflcation;Revision F,1999.
C.NECA l¨Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction;National ElectHcal Contractors
Association;2010.
D.NEヽ い WDl‐Ceneral Color Requirements for Wiring Devices;National Electrical Manufacturers
Association;1999(R2010).
E.NEMA WD6‐Wiring Device―Dimensional Speciflcations;National Electrical Manufacturers
Association;2012.
F. NFPA 70‐National Electrical Code;National Fire Protection Association;Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
G.IAC 180‐Illinois Administrat市 e Code 180
H. lIL 20‐Ceneral‐Use Snap Switches;Curent Edition,Including All Revisions.
I. llL 498‐Attachment Plugs and Receptacies;Curent Edition,Including AH Revisions.
J. lIL 514D¨Cover Plates fbr Flush‐Mounted Wiring Devices;Current Edition,Including AH Revisions.
K.lIL 943‐Ground‐Fault Circuit‐Interrupters;Curent Edition,Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBⅣIITTALS
A. Subnlit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide inanufactureris catalog infonnation showing diinensions,colors,and
conflgurations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Conform to requirements ofNFPA 70.
B. Confom to lninois Administrative Code 180 and aH building codes as∥sted in IAC section 180.60
C.Manufacturer QualincatiOns:Company specializing m manufacturing the pЮ ducts specined in this
sectlon with minimum three years documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ⅣEANUFACTURERS
A. Hubbell lncorporated;_____:WWW.hubbe11‐wiringocom.
B. Leviton Manufacturing Company,Inc;_____:―・leviton.com.
C. Pass 2貶 Seymour,a brand ofLegrand North America,Inc;______: ―・legrand.us
D. Source Linlitations: For each type ofwiring device furnish products produced by a single inanufacturer
and obtained■o■l a single supplier.
ARCON 15095 262726‐1llVIRING DEVICES
2.02 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS
A. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed
outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
B. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.
C. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens.
D. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.
2.03 ALL WIRING DEVICES
A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
B. Finishes:
l. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with stainless steel wall plate unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: White with galvanized steel wall plate unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover
unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 WALL SWITCHES
A. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver
alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and
where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.
l. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back
wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
B. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade,20 A, 1201277 V with standard toggle type switch
actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four
way as indicated on the drawings.
l. Single pole
a. HubbellHBLl22l
b. Leviton l22l - 2
c. Pass and SeymourPS2OAClI
2. Two pole
a. Hubbell IiBL 1222
b. Leviton 1222-2
c. Pass and SeymourPS20AC2I
3. Three way
a. Hubbell 1223
b. Levition 1223-2
c. Pass and SeymourPS20AC3I
C. Pilot Light Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade,20 A,1201277 V with red illuminated standard
toggle tlpe switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load on; single pole single throw,
double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.
D. Locking Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 1201277 V with lever type keyed switch
actuator and maintained contacts; switches keyed alike; single pole single throw, double pole single
throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.
2.05 INTERIORRECEPTACLES
A. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD I and NEMA WD 6,
and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; qpes as indicated on the
drawings.
l. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back
wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
ARCON 15095 262726‐2WIRING DEVICES
2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.
B. ConvenienceReceptacles:
l. StandardConvenience Receptacles: Industrialspecification grade,20A, l25V,NEMA5-20R;
single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.
a. Hubbell HBL 5362
b. Leviton 5362
c. Pass and Seymour 53624
C. GFCI Receptacles:
l. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection and light to
indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943,
class A.
2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125Y, NEMA 5-20&
rectangular decorator style.
a. HubbellGFR5352A
b. Levition 7899
c. Pass and Seymour 2094
3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, l25Y , NEMA
5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL
498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.
2.06 WALL PLATES
A. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.
l. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types ofcorresponding wiring devices.
2. Size: Standard;
-.
3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.
B. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 spec grade stainless steel.
C. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws.
D. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged cover and
corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed.
E. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and
corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs
connected and identified as extra-duty type.
F. Plates shall be held in place with screws finished to match the plates.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verifo that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verifu that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly
sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Veri$ that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Veri! that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.
F. Veri! that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring
devices.
G. Verifi that openings in access floor are in proper locations.
H. Verifi that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes'
ARCON 15095 262726‐3WIRING DEVICES
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA I and, where applicable,
NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.
B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA l, including mounting
heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated.
C. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required for installation of wiring
devices provided under this section.
l. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.
b. Receptacles: I 8 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.
2. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to
manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds
300 v.
F. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more
than one conductor to wiring device terminals.
G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 tum around screw terminal and tightening
to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that
do not rely on screw-actuated binding.
H. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment
grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
I. For isolated ground receptacles, connect wiring device grounding terminal only to identified branch
circuit isolated equipment grounding conductor. Do not connect grounding terminal to outlet box or
normal branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
J. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not use
feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.
K. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
L. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
M. Install wall switches with OFF position down.
N. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.
O. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered
without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized
rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.
P. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or
designated for future use.
a. Install receptacles horizontal with grounding pole on right hand side.
R. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.
S. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
T. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes andjunction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible
ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets in unfinished spaces.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 to obtain mounting heights
specified.
3.05 FIf,LD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
ARCON 15095 262726‐4W:RING DEV!CES
B. Inspect each wiring device for darnage and defects.
C.Operate each wali s宙 tch,wall dimmer,and fan speed controller whh circuit energized to veri″pЮper
operation.
D.Operttc each wall switch with drcutt energized and ven″prOper Operation.
E.Verl"that each receptacle de宙 ce is energized.
F. Test each receptacle to veri″operatiOn and proper polarity.
G. Test each GFCI receptacle for pЮ per tripping operation according to inanufacturers instructions.
H. Corect unHng denciencies and replace damaged or defective wlHng devices.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A.Attust devices and wall plttes to be nush andに vd.
3.07 CLEANING
A.Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt,paint,or other foreign material and restore to match original
factory■nish.
END OF SECTION 262726
ARCON 15095 262726‐ 5 W:R:NG DEVICES
SECT10N 271005
STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA―INSIDE‐PLANT
PARTl GENERAL
l.01 SECT10N INCLUDES
A. Communications system design requirements.
Bo Communications pathways.
C. Copper cable and terlninations.
D.Communications identiflcation.
E. Data Cabling
l.02 DEFINITIONS
A.BICSI:Building lndustry Consulting SeⅣice lnternational.
B. Cross‐Connect: A facility enabling the terlnination ofcable elements and their interconnection or
cross‐connection.
C.EMI:ElectЮ magnetic interference.
D.IDC:Insulation displacement connector.
E. Ladder Rack: A fabricated structure consisting ofヽ vo longitudinal side ralls connected by individual
transverse members(rungs).
F. LAN:Local area ne“vork.
G. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable
terlninates.
H. RCDD:Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
I. UTP:Unshielded twisted pair.
1.03 C00DRINAT10N OF WORK
A. Contractor shan hrnish and instan aH conduit/raceway as required for the structured cabHng distribution
system.This includes aH raceway explicitly shown on plans or generically required for a complete,
hnctional system.
B Contractor shall hmish and install all specialty backboxes for devices as required for the structured
cabling distHbution system This includes an backboxes expHcitly shown on plans or genericany
required for a complete,functional system
C. Contractor shan furnish and instan a∥branch circuits required for the structured cabling distHbution
systenl as specifled. This includes aH cirOuits explicitly shown on plans or generica∥y required for a
complete,functional system.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.American National Standards lnstitute/Telecommunications lndustヮ Association/Electronic lndustries
Alliance(ANS1/TIA/EIA)ANS1/TIA/EIA‐568‐B.l Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standards Part l:General Requirements,and an associated addenda.
B. ICEA S…90‐661‐Category 3,5,&5e lndividuany Unshielded Twisted Pair lndoor Cables(With Or
Without An Overa:l Shield)For Use in General Purpose and LAN Communications WiHng Systems
Technical Requirements;Insulated Cable Engineers Association;2012.(ANS1/1CEA S‐90‐661)
C.hlFPA 70‐National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,
Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
D.IAC 180‐11linois Administrat市 e Code 180.
E.TIA¨492AAAB‐A‐Detail Speciflcation for 50‐um Core Diameter/125¨um Cladding Diameter Class la
Graded‐Index Multimode Optical Fibers;Telecommunications lndustry Association;Rev A,2009.
ARCON 15095 271005‐l STRUCTURED CABL:NG FOR VOICE AND
DATA‐INSIDE‐PLANT
F. TIA-492C&{{ - Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers;
Telecommunications Industry Association; 1998 (R 2002).
G. TIA-526-7 - OFSTP-7 - Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant;
Telecommunications Industry Association; 2002.
H. TIA-526-14 - OFSTP-14 - Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant;
Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev B, 2010.
I. TIA-568-C.l - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard; Telecommunications
Industry Association; Rev C, 2009 (with Addenda; 2012).
J. TIA-568-C.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard -Part2. Balanced Twisted
Pair Cabling Components; Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev C, 2009.
K. TIA/EIA-568-B.3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 3: Optical Fiber
Cabling Components Standard, and Addendum I - Additional Transmission Performance Specifications
for 50/125 um OpticalFiber Cables; Rev B,2000; Addendum l.
L. TIA-569-C - Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces; Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev
C, 20 12 (with Addend a; 20 I 3).
M. TIA-606-8 - Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure; Telecommunications
Industry Association; Rev B, 2012.
N. TIA-607-B - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises;
Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev B, 2012 (with Addenda; 2013).
O. ANSVJ-STD-607 - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications; Rev A, 2002.
P. ANSVTIA/EIA-526 Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Systems, and all associated addenda.
a. ANSVTIA/EIA-758 Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard, and all
associated addenda.
R. International Standards Organizationllnternational Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC) DIS I1801,
January 6,1994
S. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) X3T9.5 Requirements for UTP at 100 Mbps
T. W 444 - Communications Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
U. UL 497 - Standard for Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communications Circuits; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
V. EIA-3 l0-D - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Electronic Industries Association;
1992
W. UL 50, Cabinets and Boxes
X. UL I 5 8 I - Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
y. UL 1863 - Communications-Circuit Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Z. Work performed should additionally comply with and follow guidelines established in the latest
editiorVrevision, as of the date of the Contract Documents, of the following publications:
l. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)
2. BICSI Customer-Owned Outside Plant (CO-OSP)
3. American National Standards InstituteA.lational Electricat Contractors Association/Building
Industry Consulting Service International (ANSIAIECA/BICSI) 568-2001 Standard for Installing
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
ARCON 15095 271005-2 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VO:CE AND
DATA‐!NSIDE―PLANT
B.
C.
l. Reviews of submittals are to establish general conformance to design intent and does not waive
contract requirements. Contractor is responsible for dimensions, quantities, mounting accessories,
methods of construction, and compliance with the Contract Documents.
2. Provide separate submittal product data/shop drawings for each fixture, device, and equipment type
clearly indicating the type designation per the Contract Documents and all pertinent options and
accessories. Do not group similar fixture types together on a single cut sheet. Submittals which do
not indicate option data where multiple selections exist will be returned without being reviewed.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product.
l. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
2. Installationmethods.
Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements on isometric schematic diagram of network layout,
showing cable routings, telecommunication closets, rack and enclosure layouts and locations, service
entrance, and grounding, prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications Distribution
Designer (RCDD).
l. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy ofproposed labeling schedules and identification
plates, in software and format selected by Owner.
2. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
Evidence of qualifications for installer.
Test Plan: Complete and detailed plan, with list of test equipment, procedures for inspection and testing.
D.
E.
Submit along with product data.
F. Field Test Reports.
G. Project Record Documents: Prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications Distribution
Designer (RCDD).
l. Record actual locations of outlet boxes and distribution frames.
2. Show as-installed color coding, pair assignment, polarization, and cross-connect layout.
3. Identifi distribution frames and equipment rooms by room number on contract drawings.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply, and
operation and maintenance instructions; include copy ofproject record documents.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60.
C. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. Engage an
experienced contractor who:
l. Shall be fully capable and experienced in the installation of the communications systems specified,
and have a minimum of five (5) years experience on similar systems.
2. Has BICSI-trained and -certified, or equally qualified and certified, installers and technicians on
staffand assign them to this project. If personnel of Contractor are not BICSI-trained and
-certified, Contractor to submit with bid all necessary credentials and certificates of training for
personnel stafffor evaluation and determination by CPS OTS Sr. Infrastructure Manager that said
credentials and certificates are equal to BICSI standards. The project shall be staffed at all times by
Installers and Technicians who, in the role of lead crafts persons, will be able to provide leadership
and technical resources for the remaining crafts persons on the project.
3. Shall be certified by the manufacturing company(-ies) in all aspects of installation and testing of the
products described within the telecommunications systems specifications. Specifically, those
manufacturer(s) whose components constitute a component of the structured cabling system(s)
installed as part ofthe voice and data transport systems. Said certification is to be such that the
Contractor is able to offer and fully comply with the requirements to provide Owner with an
extended warranty as defined in "system Warranty and Application Assurance" Article of this
Section.
D. InstallerSupervision:
ARCON 15095
DATA‐:NSIDE‐PLANT
271005-3 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
l. The selected Contractor shall provide a Project Manager to act a single point of contact for all
activities performed under this section. The Project Manager shall be a Registered
Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD). The RCDD shall have a minimum of 3 years
experience in design and installation. The designer must have suffrcient experience in this type
project(s) as to be able to lend adequate technical support to the field forces during installation,
during the warranty period and during any extended warranty periods or maintenance contracts.
The Contractor must attach a resume of the responsible designer to the Contractor's response for
evaluation.
2. The Project Manager, or designee thereof, shall be required to attend project meetings as required
until proj ect closeout/s ignoff.
3. Should the Project Manager assigned to this project change during the installation, the new Project
Manager assigned must meet all qualifications stated in this section, and must also submit a resume
for review by the Owner.
4. If, in the opinion of the Owner, the Project Manager does not possess adequate qualifications to
support the project, the Owner reseryes the right to require the Contractor to assign a designer
whom, in the Owner's opinion, possesses the necessary skills and experience required of this
project.
E. Materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
production of the required type of material or equipment for at least five years (unless specifically
exempted by the Owner) and shall be the manufacturer's latest design with published properties.
F. Source Limitations: Equipment and materials of the same general type shall be of the same manufacture
throughout the project to provide uniform appearance, operation and maintenance.
G. Equipment and materials shall be without blemish or defect.
H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in City of Chicago
Electrical Code, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
I. Comply with NFPA 70 for abandoned cabling.
I.O7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in
spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and
humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Do not deliver or install equipment frames and ladder rack until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete.
C. Receive, handle, and store communications system items and materials at the project site. Materials and
items shall be placed so that they are protected from damage and deterioration.
D. Stage materials in a secure area of the project site until installation.
1.08 FIBER OPTIC CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Optical fiber backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between MDF and the IDF and
Concentrator Enclosures in the telecommunications cabling system struature. Cabling system consists of
backbone cables, intermediate, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for
backbone-to-equipment connections.
I.O9 HORJZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the
communications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the MDF and/or the IDF.
This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing
protocols.
l. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
B. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is determined by the communications area serving that
link, as follows:
ARCON 15095 271005-4 SttRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA‐lNS:DE―PLANT
l. For horizontal cabling served from a Concentrator Enclosure, the maximum allowable length is l4l
feet (43 meters).
2. For horizontal cabling served directly from the MDF <or from IDFP, the maximum allowable
length is 295 feet (90 meters).
a. The maximum allowable lengths do not include an allowance for patch cords
1.10 PERF'ORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling syst€m shall comply with transmission standards in
TIA/EIA-568-C.2, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
1.1I WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under other requirements of the Contract
Documents.
I . Provide a minimum one ( I ) year warranty for all parts and labor provided under this electrical
specifications for all components not covered under the Special Warranty provisions of this Article.
B. The Contractor shall guarantee at the time of the bid that all telecommunications equipment, cabling and
components meet or exceed specifications.
C. Special Warranty: Provide to Owner an Extended System and Application Assurance Warranty covering
product and installation defects for all passive manufactured components of the structured cabling
system(s) installed as part of the voice and data transport systems. Passive components are defined as
those exhibiting no gain or contributing no energy. Warrant to Owner the following:
l. The passive products that comprise the telecommunications structured cabling system will be free
from manufacturing defects in material or workmanship under normal and proper use.
2. All approved passive cabling products that comprise the structured cabling system exceed the
specification standards and will conform to the performance specifications ofthe associated product
data sheet in effect at the time the product is utilized.
3. The installation will meet, if not exceed, the requirements and the standards for cabling
configurations specified in these standards.
4. The Special Warranty shall provided an application assurance guaranteeing structured cabling
system shall be capable of running a minimum of Gigabit Ethernet (l000Mbs) in the horizontal
channel, and l0-Gigabit Ethemet ( I 0,000Mbs) in the backbone.
5. The Special Warranty shall be applicable to the original site of installation. Under the warranty, the
manufacturer will either repair or replace the defective product itself at the manufacturer's cost, or
the manufacturer will pay an authorized reseller for the cost to repair or replace any such defective
product on behalf of the manufacturer.
6. Transfer manufacturer's warranties to the Owner in addition to the General System Guarantee.
Submit these warranties on each item in list form with shop drawings. Detail specific parts within
equipment that are subject to separate conditional warranty. Warranty proprietary equipment and
systems involved in this contract during the guarantee period. Final payment shall not relieve
Contractor of these obligations.
7. Special Warranty shall be held by the product manufacturer(s).
8. Special Warranty Period:25 years from date of acceptance.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. CATEGORY 6e UTP CABLE AND CONNECTING HARDWARE (Plenum)
l. Category 6e UTP: Manufacturers of Cable: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following manufacturers:
a. Hubbell Premise Wiring NEXTSPEED Category 6E cable
b. Panduit GenSpeed 6500 Premium Category 6E cable
c. BerkTek Lanmark 2000 Category 6E cable
ARCON 15095 271005.5 STRUCTUREDCABLING FORVOICEAND
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
2. Category 6e UTP: Manufacturers of Connecting Hardware and Patch Cords: Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:
a. Hubbell Premise Wiring NEXTSPEED Category 6 Connectivity
b. Panduit TX6 PLUS Category 6 Connectivity
c. Ortronics Clarity 6 Series Connectivity
d. Ortronics Inc., Clarity6 series components
2,02 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. Provide a complete permanent system of cabling and pathways for voice and data communications,
including cables, conduits and wireways, pull wires, support structures, enclosures and cabinets, and
outlets.
l. Comply with T14-568 (cabling) and T14-569 (pathways), latest editions (commercial standards).
2. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and T14-607 and are UL listed or
third party independent testing laboratory certified.
3. In this project, the term plenum is defined as return air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts, under
raised floors, and other air-handling spaces.
B. Main Distribution Frame (MDF): Centrally located support structure for terminating horizontal cables
that extend to telecommunications outlets, functioning as point of presence to external service provider.
l. Locate main distribution frame as indicated on the drawings.
2. Capacity: As required to terminate all cables required by design criteria plus minimum 25 percent
spare space.
C. Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDF): Support structures for terminating horizontal cables that extend
to telecommunications outlets.
l. Locate intermediate distribution frames as indicated on the drawings.
D. Backbone Cabling: Cabling, pathways, and terminal hardware connecting intermediate distribution
frames (IDF's) with main distribution frame (MDF), wired in star topology with main distribution frame
at center hub of star.
E. Cabling to Outlets: Specified horizontal cabling, wired in star topology to distribution frame located at
center hub ofstar; also referred to as "links".
2.03 PATHWAYS
A. Conduit: As specified in Section 260534: provide pull cords in all conduit.
B. Underground Service Entrance: Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit, Schedule 40.
2.04 COPPER CABLE AND TERMINATIONS
A. Data Cabling
l. Horizontal Data
a. Cable
I ) Copper Horizontal Cable: TIA/EIA-568 Category 6 solid conductor unshielded twisted
pair (UTP), 24 AWG, 100 ohm; 4 individually rwisted pairs; covered with blue jacket
and complying with all relevant parts of and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-568
andllL 444.
(a) Provide NFPA 70 type CMP plenum-rated cable.
b. Jacks and Connectors
l) RI-45, non-keyed, terminated with 110-style insulation displacement connectors; high
impact thermoplastic housing; complying with same standard as specified horizontal
cable and UL 1863.
(a) Color: Blue
(l) Color: Front face ofjack shall be colored. Use ofa color-coded icon insert on
a neutral-colorjack shall not be acceptable.
(b) Performance: 500 mating cycles.
(c) Data Jacks: 4-pair, pre-wired to T5684 configuration, with color-coded indications
for T5688 configuration.
ARCON 15095 271005 - 6 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE.PLANT
B. Category 6 UTP: Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables terminated with eight-position modular
plug at each end.
l. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6
performance.
a. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.
b. Jack Modules shall comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2.
2. Patch Cord plug modules shall comply with ANSI/TIA-968-A requirements. Patch cords shall be of
same manufacturer and consistent with components and performance level of cross-listed solutions
indicated in this Article.
3. Color: Coordinate with UTP cable color per system application.
4. Quantity to be provided:
a. Work Area: Provide one (l) 6-ft patch cord for each Category 6 UTP outlet installed per
system application.
b. Equipment End:
I ) Data Racks:
(a) Provide (l ) s-ft patch cord for one-half(fifty-percent) ofthe total number of
Category 6 UTP outlets installed per system application.
(b) Provide ( I ) 7-ft patch cord for one-half (fifty-percent) of the total number of
Category 6 UTP outlets installed per system application.
5. Delivery & Turn-over: Notify District Sr. Infrastructure Manager when patch cords have been
delivered to project site. Deliver patch cords to site at least one week prior to substantial
completion and store in locked, secure MDF room, or other locked, secure room as coordinated
with Owner, until turn-over to district information technology manager personnel. Contractor is
responsible for all patch cords until direct turn-over to district information technology manager.
2.05 IDENTIFICATIONPRODUCTS
A. Comply with TIA-606.
2.06 CROSS.CONNECTION EQUIPMENT
A. Patch Panels for Copper Cabling: Sized to fit EIA standard 19 inch wide equipment racks; 0.09 inch
thick aluminum; cabling terminated on Type I l0 insulation displacement connectors; printed circuit
board interface.
l. Jacks: Non-keyed RI-45, suitable for and complying with same standard as cable to be terminated;
maximum 48 ports per standard width panel.
a. Category rating to match category ofspecifiedjack (see horizontal cabling).
b. Jack color shall match the color ofspecified userjack (see horizontal cabling).
2. Capacity: Provide ports sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.
3. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered consecutively;
comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.
4. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel.
5. Provide full height (min 2U) patch cord organizers for each patch panel
a. Minimum 2U height
b. Panel material: l6 ga cold-rolled stee
c. cover mateiral: l6 ga cold-rolled steel
d. Ring: 0.225" diamter steel road
e. Black power coat
f. Front and rear rings
C. Front and rear cover
6. Patch Cords: Provide one patch cord for patch panel port.
2.07 LABEL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
manufacturers:
l. Brady Corporation
ARCON 15095 271005 -7 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
2. 3M
3. Panduit Corporation
B. Cable/wire markers shall be self adhesive, self laminating mechanically printed with a clear protective
laminating over wrap or protective heat-shrink tubing.
C. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating
adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.OI DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Receive, handle, and store communications system items and materials at the project site. Materials and
items shall be placed so that they are protected from damage and deterioration.
B. Stage materials in a secure area of the project site until installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION. GENERAL
A. The drawings for work under telecommunications specification sections related to communication
systems are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of work and indicate the general
arrangement of outlets, equipment, termination hardware, fixtures and other work included in the
Contract.
B. Location of items required by the drawings or specifications not definitely fixed by dimensions are
approximate only and exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and results shall be
determined at the site and shall be subject to the approval of the Owner.
C. Follow drawings in laying out work, check drawings of other trades to verifu spaces in which work will
be installed, and maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points.
l. Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, the Owner shall be notified before
proceeding with installation.
2. Minor rerouting and changes in location shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Coordinate the mounting heights of communications equipment and raceways to clear the opening
heights ofdoors and the heights ofequipment which needs to be removed and replaced.
4. As necessary, adjust elevations of rack-mounted termination hardware and horizontal wire
management panels so as to compensate for rack unit sizes of acfual hardware used, as compared to
hardware rack unit sizes depicted in Contract Drawings.
D. Perform all work with skilled mechanics of the particular trade involved in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
E. Perform all work in cooperation and coordination with other trades and schedule.
F. Furnish other trades advance information on locations and sizes offrames, boxes, sleeves and openings
needed for the work, routes for conduit, and also furnish information and shop drawings necessary to
permit trades affected to install their work properly and without delay.
G. Where there is evidence that work of one trade will interfere with the work of other trades, all trades shall
assist in working out space allocations to make satisfactory adjustments and shall be prepared to submit
and revise coordinated shop drawings.
H. With the approval of the Owner and without additional cost to the Owner, make minor modifications in
the work as required by structural interferences, by interferences with work of other trades or for proper
execution ofthe work.
I. Work installed before coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such
other trades shall be changed to correct such condition without additional cost to the Owner and as
directed by the Owner.
J. Minor changes in the locations of outlets, fixtures and equipment shall be made prior to rough in at the
direction of the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner.
K. Contractor shall cooperate with other frades and coordinate work so that conflicts with other work are
eliminated.
ARCON 15095 271005 - 8 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
L. Equipment shall be installed with adequate space allowed for removal, repair or changes to equipment.
Ready accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided without moving
other equipment which is to be installed or which is in place. Contractor shall verifr measurements.
Discrepancies shall be brought to the Owner's attention for interpretation.
M. Determine temporary openings in the buildings that will be required for the admission of apparatus
furnished under this Division, and notifu the Owner accordingly. In the event of failure to give sufficient
notice in time to zurange for these openings during construction, assume all costs of providing such
openings thereafter.
N. Location of communication outlets and raceway pathways are approximate and exact locations shall be
determined on site.
O. Contractor shall refer to contract documents for details, reflected ceiling plans, and large scale drawings.
P. Comply with Communication Service Provider requirements'
a Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with TIA-607 and NFPA 70.
R. INSTALLATION OF CABLES
L Comply withNECA 1.
2. General Requirements for Cabling:
a. comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2.
b. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
c. Install I l0-sryle IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
d. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only
at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
e. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables not more than 6 inches from cabinets,
boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. Do not over-cinch or crush cables.
f. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
C. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than 4X cable diameter. Install lacing bars and
distribution spools.
h. Hook and loop (Velcro)-style cable ties shall be used to bundle and secure exposed cables in
MDF/IDF rooms. Use of plastic cable ties is not permitted.
i. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
j Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
shall not be used for heating.
k. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull
tensions, and do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension.
I ) When installing in conduit, use only lubricant approved by cable manufacturer and do
not chafe or damage outerjacket.
l. Service Loops: Provide the following minimum extra length of cable, dressed and routed
neatly:
I ) At MDF/IDF frames: 60 inches, neatly installed in vertical wire manager or
accommodated by additional routing around overhead ladder rack runway.
2) At Surface Raceway Outlets - Copper: l2 inches, neatly installed in surface raceway
channel.
3. UTP Cable Installation:
a. Comply with TIA/EIA'568-C.2.
b. Maintain pair fwists as close as possible to point of termination, but do not untwist UTP cables
more than l/8 (.125) inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
c. Concentrator Enclosures: No cabling is to be routed down through the center area ofthe
enclosure so as to inhibit the installation of network electronics.
ARCON 15095 271005 - 9 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
d. MDF/IDF: Install and route cabling on overhead ladder rack runway and within horizontal and
vertical cable guides to terminating hardware.
4. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
5. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:
a. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.3.
b. Cables shall terminate with LC-type connectors secured in connecting hardware that is rack or
enclosure mounted.
c. Concentrator Enclosures: No cabling is to be routed down through the center area ofthe
enclosure so as to inhibit the installation of network electronics.
d. MDF/IDF: Install and route cabling on overhead ladder rack runway and within horizontal and
vertical cable guides to terminating hardware.
6. Separation from EMI Sources:
a. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice and
data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and
equipment.
b. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
l) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.
2) Electrical Equipment Rating between2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.
c. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded
power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
l) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than2 kVA: A minimum of 2-ll2 inches.
2) Electrical Equipment Rating between2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
d. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines
and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as
follows:
l) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than2 kVA: No requirement.
2) Electrical Equipment Rating between2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.
3) Elechical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
e. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA
or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.
f. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5
inches.
S. INSTALLATION OF CABINET RACKS AND ENCLOSURES
l. ComplywithNECA l.
2. Install all communications hardware components in accordance with project specifications and plan,
elevation, and layout information within Contract Drawings.
3. The contractor shall coordinate the installation ofcommunications cabinets, racks and enclosures
with the installation of the communications pathways and cabling to eliminate any potential damage
to cables, or any other installed communications components or equipment.
4. Backboards: Install plyrvood with "A" side outward and at elevation and wall location(s) as
indicated in Contract Drawings. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners.
Cover fire-rating mark during painting. Remove cover afterwards, leaving mark exposed for
subsequent inspection by authority having jurisdiction.
5. Communications Floor-mounted Racks: Assemble and install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations. Racks shall be assembled such that mounting rails are exactly
perpendicular to the base.
a. Secure to floor utilizing lag bolts or masonry anchors, and washers, appropriate to application
and flooring condition. The use of a Tapcon, or equal, masonry screw with washer is not
acceptable. Secure at all four locations ofrack base.
ARCON 15095 271005-10 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA‐!NSIDE‐PLANT
b. Secure each communications floor-mounted rack to overhead ladder rack using
eack-to-runway mounting plates, brackets, j-bolts, nuts/washers, etc., installed in compliance
with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
6. Wire management panels: Secure to communication relay racks in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.03 PATHWAYEXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables.
l. Veri$ proposed routes ofpathways. Check raceways, ladder racks, and other elements for
compliance with space allocations, clearances, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation,
and other conditions affecting installation. Verifr that cabling can be installed complying with EMI
clearance requirements.
2. Prepare wall penetrations and verifr that penetrations of rated fire walls are made using products
labeled for type ofwall penetrated.
3. Identifr plan to support cables and raceways in suspended ceilings. Verify weight of individual
types and sizes of cables. Verify that load capacity of cable support structures is adequate for each
pathway.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at least l8 inches below frnish grade; encase in at least 3
inches thick concrete for at least 60 inches out from the building line.
B. Install pathways with the following minimum clearances:
l. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment, and
unintemrptible power systems.
2. l2 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards.
3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixures.
4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes.
C. Conduit, in Addition to Requirements of Section 260534:
D. Conduit:
l. Do not install more than 2 (two) 90 degree bends in a single horizontal cable run.
2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially installed.
3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors except where
specifically indicated to be exposed.
a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and
telecommunications rooms.
b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as ifexposed to view.
c. Where exposed to view, install parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural
members.
d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at l2 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder; seal
penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit.
E. Cable Routing
l. All cabling to re routed within approved raceway or above lay-in ceiling. Cabling shall be hidden
by ceiling or raceway in all locations of the building with the exception of IDF and MDF rooms or
as otherwise noted on the drawings.
a. Where cable tray is provided, route cabling within cable tray.
b. Where conduit sleeve is provided, route cabling within conduit sleeve
c. Above lay-in ceilings, where cable tray or conduit sleeves are not available:
I ) Where raceway for cabling is not provided, Contractor shall run cabling through Erico
Cablecat 2" J hooks.
(a) J hooks shall be directly attached to building structure at a maximum of 4'-0"
center-to-center.
ARCON 15095 271005‐1l STRUCTURED CABLiNG FOR VOICE AND
DATA―lNS!DE¨PLANT
(b) Additional J hooks will be added as necessary to limit the maximum cable catenary
(cable sag) to 12" maximum.
(c) Install tye-wraps around all J hooks upon completion of cable pulls.
(d) J hook cable density shall not exceed 600/o of the maximum cable count suggested
by manufacture. If necessary, provide additional level of J hooks for high cable
density runs.
(e) Contractor shall provide all mounting hardware (threaded rod, unistrut, etc.)
Necessary to solidly mounted, complete cable raceway system.
3.05 FIRESTOPPING
A. Utilize an approved firestop assembly to seal all cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and
wall assemblies. Assembly must achieve the same smoke/fire-resistance rating as the floor or wall being
penetrated.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."
D. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.06 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
C. Coordinate location of communications grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the communications grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG
equipment grounding conductor.
E. Bond each segment of ladder rack runway using bonding straps. Ladder rack connection fittings are not
considered an acceptable bonding mechanism. Install bonding straps in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
F. Bond metallic equipment to the communications grounding bus bar in MDF [or IDF], using not smaller
than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.
l. Ground ladder rack system to communications grounding bus bar.
2. Ground each floor-mounted rack to communications grounding bus bar. Bonding to overhead
ladder rack is not a permissible.
3. Ground each concentrator enclosure to communications grounding bus bar. At enclosure , terminate
equipment grounding conductor to grounding bus bar located within enclosure.
G. ESD Port Kit: Install ESD port kit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations,
on communications mounting elements as follows:
l. Floor-mounted racks: Mount a kit directly to both the front and the rear sides of the right vertical
mounting rail of the center most rack in MDF [and the center most rack in IDF], at 48" above floor,
using thread-forming screw and antioxidant compound. Coordinate exact location with Owner.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. All labeing standards will be determined in conjuction with the district information technology
administrator. The district technology administrator shall have final approval on all labeling schemes.
Labeling schemes applied without approval shall be replaced/modified to comply.
B. Labeling shall minimually comply with EIA/TIA labeling standards.
C. LABELING HIERARCHY
l. When labeling communications cabling and pathways always begin the labeling scheme with the
room or location ofgreater significance.
2. Consult with district Sr. Infrastrucfure Manager for clarifications regarding application of hierarchy
table to the project. Hierarchy relationships that must be adhered to include, but are not limited to:
a. Cabling and/or pathways between the MDF and any IDFs must list the MDF first.
b. Cabling and/or pathways between a concentrator enclosure and the work area must list the
concentrator enclosures fi rst.
ARCON 15095 271005 - 12 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
c. Cabling and/or pathways between an MDF or IDF and a wireless access point outlet must list
the MDF or IDF first.
3. Labeling must be the same on both ends of the cable and/or pathway.
4. Labeling for all communications infrastructure elements shall be consistent across the installation.
Coordinate with requirements for labels and identification defined in Contract Drawings.
D. WIRE IDENTIFICATION
l. Cable/wire markers shall be installed within four (4) inches of each end of the cable, and where
cable is accessible in junction or pull boxes. Information list on cable/wire marker shall include,
but is not limited to:
a. Cable and type
b. Terminationhardware
c. Terminationposition
2. Identification within Connector Fields in MDF, [IDFs,] and concentrator enclosures: Label each
connector and each discrete unit ofcable-terminating and connecting hardware.
E. WORKSTATIONLABELING
l. Administration at the work area / workstation will be carried out in proximity to the closest
Distribution Frame (MDF, IDF).
2. The administration of the individual Data/Voice locations will reference the MDF or ID room
location.
3. Administration of the individual jack locations will be used for local tracking or hacing of the patch
panel termination points (Data/Voice jacks back to the closest termination in the Distribution
Frame). Typical numbering of the jack locations will begin with the termination point closest to the
Distribution Frame and continuing in numerical series outward from that location.
3.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit
communications systems installation, including all pathway elements and supports necessary for same.
Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. Perform work so as to not impair structural
stability of building construction and systems.
B. Conduits passing through roofs or other surfaces exposed to weather shall be properly flashed as
specified in roofing and waterproofing sections. This flashing work shall be part of this division of work.
C. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces.
Install new firestopping where existing firestopping has been disturbed during the course of install.
Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.09 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section
"Painting."
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the
degree ofdamage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and
application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
3.10 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation inspect exposed finishes. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction
debris. Repair damaged finish(es), including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. All equipment, hardware and finishes shall be cleaned prior to final acceptance. Unless otherwise
indicated, clean shall mean free of dust, dirt, mud, debris, oil, grease, residues, and contamination.
C. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets
are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Protect conduit and wireway
ARCON 15095 271005. 13 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE-PI.ANT
openings against the entrance of foreign matter by means of plugs or caps. Cover fixtures, materials,
equipment and devices fumished or installed under this section or otherwise protect against damage, both
before and after installation. Hardware, materials, equipment, or devices damaged prior to final
acceptance ofthe work shall be restored to their original condition or replaced.
D. During the course of communications installation work, provide for on-going proper disposal of all
debris, including but not limited to: equipment packaging and shipping materials, shipping pallets, empty
cable reels/boxes, cable cuttings, etc. The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the site free from
accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by its employees or work. Remove all crates, cartons,
and other waste materials or trash from the working areas at the end of each working day. Flammable
waste material must be removed from the working areas at the time of generation. All rubbish and debris,
combustible or not, shall be discarded in covered metal containers daily and removed from the premises
at least weekly and legally disposed of.
3.I1 COMMISSIONING AND DEMONSTRATION
A. INSPECTION
l. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings.
Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding
for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Visually confirm Category 6 marking of outlets, outlet/connectors, and patch panels for horizontal
UTP cabling for Data/Wireless, Kronos and MMTV applications.
3. Visually confirm Category 5e marking of outlets, outlet/connectors, termination blocks and patch
panels for horizontal UTP cabling voice and 25-pair Category 5e backbone applications.
4. Visually confirm Category 3 marking of copper backbone UTP cables for indoor voice backbone
applications.
5. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch
cords, and labeling ofall components.
6. Inspect cable terminations for color coded labels of proper type.
B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
L Perform tests and inspections.
2. Copper UTP Cable Tests:
a. Copper UTP Test Instruments:
I ) Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test
Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in
"Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are
qualified by test equipment manufacturer for permanent link test configuration.
2) For horizontal UTP cable certification tests, use a Level III tester.
b. Copper Backbone UTP Cable Tests:
I ) Test copper backbone UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent
faults, polarity between conductors, and for insertion loss (attenuation). Test operation
of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not
cross-connection.
c. UTP Performance Tests:
I ) Test permanent link for each outlet. Perform the following tests according to
TIA/EIA-568-B. I and TIA/EIA-S68-8.2 :
(a) Wire map.
(b) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).
(c) Insertion loss.
(d) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
(e) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.
(0 Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).
(g) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).
(h) Return loss.
ARCON 15095 271005 - 14 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
(i) Propagation delay.
0) Delay skew.
2) Testing for Category 6 horizontal UTP must additionally report values for
attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio (ACR), and power sum attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio
(PSACR).
3) A star ("*"; passing shall not be considered acceptable.
Optical Fiber Cable Tests:
a. Optical Fiber Test Instruments:
I ) Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use
only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for
channel or link test configuration.
b. Optical Time Domain Reflectometry Tests: After terminating optical fiber cables, one
individual fiber from each backbone cable installed shall be tested using an optical time
domain reflectometer (OTDR). Perform OTDR testing in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended test procedures. Test to determine the installed length, continuity, and
OTDR-based attenuation measurement. Provide test report identifting backbone cable
identification and indicating corresponding values fiom tests.
c. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests according to
TIA/EIA-S68-8. I and TIA/EIA-568-8.3.
l) Multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in both directions
according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.
2) Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in
TIA/EIA-568-B.I.
3) These readings must not be higher than the "Optimal Attenuation Loss (OAL)". The
OAL will be calculated using the manufacturer's factory certified test results, (db/km)
adjusted for the actual installed lengths (dBs) plus the manufacturer's best published
attenuation losses for the connector on this project and/or splice installed on this project
(0.25dB for Connectors and 0.lOdB for splices).
4) Link End-to-End Attenuation Test reports shall include:
(a) Cable identification and Strand numbers
(b) The OAL value for each link
(c) The theoretical maximum attenuation value, per TIA/EIA-568-B.1, for each link
(d) Tested values for attenuation
Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that
is formatted similar to Table 10. I in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the
computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
End-to-end cabling will be considered defective ifit does not pass tests and inspections. Correct
failures and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new components
and retest to demonstration compliance with requirements.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 27IOO5
4.6ARCON 15095
DAttA…:NS:DE‐PLANT 271005…15 STRUCTURED CABLiNG FOR VOICE AND
ATTACHMENT C
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROECT
ATTACHMENT C
LIST OF DRAWINGS
SHEET NOSo SHEET TITLES
GO.l Cover Sheet
AO.l Dellnolition Plans
Al.l Partial Floor Plan,Ceiling Plan and Finish Floor Plan
A2.l Schedulc&Details
El.l Electhcal Plan&Schedule
DATE LAST
REVISED
May 25,2018
May 25,2018
ヽ4ay 25,2018
NIlay 25,2018
NIlay 25,2018
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROECT
ATTACHMENT D
SPECIAL PROJECT REOUIREMENTS
1. Contractor shall have five (5) years of experience which is comparable in type and scope to
this project.
2. Work hours are 7:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Monday through Friday. Any deviation is subject to
the approval of the Village representative.
3. The project will be done on consecutive work days, excluding weekends and holidays
observed by the Village, until completed, delays only to inclernent weather.
4. Contractor is required to obtain all necessary permits from the Village of Oak Brook, and
schedule required inspections through Community Development.
5. The Contractor shall supply to the Village, phone numbers where helshe can be reached
after normal working hours.
6. The Contractor must submit all manufacturers' literature on all materials that will be used
on this project, including M.S.D.S. (Material Safety Data Sheets) prior to any work
beginning.
7. A storage location for supplies, ladders and scaffolding shall be mutually agreed upon
between the Village and the contractor before any material is stored on site. The Contractor
must deliver material with manufacturers labels intact and legible, store material on raised
platforms and cover material with protective covering.
8. Before work is started, Contractor must deliver to the job site sufficient material to complete
the project.
9. If a dumpster is required, the location of the dumpster placement shall be mutually agreed
upon between the Village and the contractor.
10. All ladders and scaffolding shall be maintained in prior working order during the course of
this project and shall be secured at the end of each workday.
1 1. Contractor must provide barricades to ensure that falling debris will not injure anyone, and
to prevent public access to the work area at all times. Yellow "CAUTION" tape will be
placed below the immediate work areas of laborers and scaffolds to warn the public of
people working overhead.
ATTACHⅣIENT D
12. At all times, Contractor must keep the work and storage areas in a clean, orderly, and a
picked up manner, to prevent debris from blowing. Clean adjoining streets and immediate
vicinity at the end of each work day. Sidewalks, windowsills, roofs and other work areas
will be broom swept to remove all debris. Daily material and debris not placed into dumpster
will be removed from the site.
13. Upon completion of the project the work area shall be cleaned. All debris and remaining
material and supplies shall be removed from the jobsite, including the dumpster within 72
hours of completion.
14. Upon completion the Contractor shall supply a one year warranty covering material and
workmanship; contractor shall submit sample warranty with bid.
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROECT
APPENDIX l
PttVAILING WAGES
Prevai:ing wage rates for
DuPage County effective
Sept.1,2017
Trade Titie
ASBESTOS ABT―GEN
AS3ESTOS ABT―MEC
BOILERMAKER
BRICK MASON
CARPENTER
CEMENT MASON
CERAMiC TILE FNSHER
Region Type Class Base
Wage
M‐F OSA OSH H/W
OT
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
BLD
BLD
BLD
ALL
ALL
BLD
BLD
ALL
Hヽ ～YALL
HWY
ALL
H昭
ALL
HWY
BLD
BLD
ALL
ALL
BLD
BLD
ALL
ALL
ALL
4120
3746
4849
4538
4635
4425
3789
4145
2930
3200
4536
4967
3034
3314
3926
5194
3958
4506
4245
5050
4733
4561
4120
15
152
15
152
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
152
152
15
1522
15
15
152
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
152
152
15
1522
152222222222222222222222222 550
500
550
500
550
500
550
1235
1443
1340
1052
1404
1212
1415
1152
1465
Pension Vacation Training
000
000
000
COMMUNiCAT10N TECH ALL
ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP ALL
ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP ALL
ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL
ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL
ELECTRIC PWR LINEMAN ALL
ELECTRIC PVVR LINEMAN ALL
ELECTRIC PVVR TRK DRV ALL
ELECTRiC PWR TRK DRV ALL
ELECTRICIAN ALL
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR ALL
FENCE ERECTOR NE
FENCE ERECTOR W
GLAZIER ALL
HT/FROSTINSULATOR ALL
IRON WORKER E
IRON WORKER W
LABORER ALL
LATHER
MACHINIST
MARBLE FINISHERS
MARBLE MASON
MATERIAL TESTER l
MATERIALS TESTER∥
MILLWRIGHT
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATlNG ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENG,NEER
ORNAMNTLIRON
WORKER
ORNAMNTLIRON
WORKER
PAINTER
PAINTER SIGNS
PILEDRIVER
PIPEFITTER
PLASTERER
PLUMBER
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALLEW
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
4635
5010
4880
4625
4450
5385
5110
5310
3800
4830
4775
4570
4430
4310
5130
4930
4675
4506
4418
3745
4635
4750
4275
4925
4835
5410
5410
5410
5410
5410
5410
5410
3800
5230
5230
5230
5230
5230
5230
5230
4925
4866
4618
4205
4835
5050
4531
5220
15
15
15
15
15
15
152222222
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
1522
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
152222222
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
1522
15
15
15
15
15
15222222222222222222222222 1522222 ■
1045
1045
1465
1465
1179
1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1805
1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1390
1887
895
1552
1628
1232
1232
1887
1435
1435
1435
1435
1435
1435
1435
1360
1435
1435
1435
1435
1435
1435
1435
1979
2076
820
318
1887
1785
1571
1335
000
185
000
000
000
000
000
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
190
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
ALL
BLD
ALL
BLD
ALL
ALL
ALL
BLD l
BLD 2
BLD 3
BLD 4
BLD 5
BLD 6
BLD 7
FLT
HW l
HW 2
HVVY 3
HWY 4
HWY 5
HWY 6
HWY 7
ALL
ALL
ALL
BLD
ALL
BLD
BLD
BLD
063
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
075
070
R00FER
SHEETMETAL WORKER
SPRINKLER F1lTER
STEEL ERECTOR
STEEL ERECTOR
STONE MASON
TERRAZZO FINISHER
TERRAZZO MASON
TILE MASON
TRAFFIC SAFETY WRKR
TRUCK DRIVER
TRUCK DRIVER
TRUCK DRIVER
TRUCK DRIVER
TUCKPOINTER
Lettend
015
015
088
M-F OT Unless otherwise noted, OT pay is required for any hour greater than 8 worked each day, Mon through Fri. The number listed is the
multiple of the base wage.
OSA Overtime pay required for every hour worked on Saturdays
OSH Overtime pay required for every hour worked on Sundays and Holidays
H/w Health/welfare benefit
Explanations DUPAGE COUNW
tRoN WoRKERS AND FENCE ERECTOR (WEST) - West of Route 53.
The following list is considered as those days for which holiday rates of wages for work performed apply: New Years Day, Memorial Day, Fourth
of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day and Veterans Day in some classifications/counties. Generally, any of these holidays which
fall on a Sunday is celebrated on the following Monday. This then makes work performed on that Monday payable at the appropriate overtime
rate for holiday pay. Common practice in a given local may alter certain days of celebration. lf in doubt, please check with IDOL.
BLD
BLD
BLD
ALL
ALL
BLD
BLD
BLD
BLD
HWY
ALL l
ALL 2
ALL 3
ALL 4
BLD
4530
4777
4920
4407
4866
4992
4054
4788
‐
3510
3685
3685
3685
3685
4517
908
1065
1225
1345
1052
1045
1065
1065
‐
810
810
810
810
810
1045
1214
1410
1155
1959
2076
1668
1276
15
15
1522
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
1522
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15222222222222222 000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
EXPLANATION OF CLASSES
ASBESTOS - GENERAL - removal of asbestos material/mold and hazardous materials from any place in a building, includinB mechanical systems
where those mechanical systems are to be removed. This includes the removal of asbestos materials/mold and hazardous materials from
ductwork or pipes in a building when the building is to be demolished at the time or at some close future date.
ASBESTOS - MECHANICAL - removal of asbestos material from mechanical systems, such as pipes, ducts, and boilers, where the mechanical
systems are to remain.
TRAFFIC SAFETY - work associated with barricades, horses and drums used to reduce lane usage on highway work, the installation and removal
oftemporary lane markings, and the installation and removal of temporary road signs.
CERAMIC TIIE FINISHER
The grouting, cleaning, and polishing of all classes of tile, whether for interior or exterior purposes, all burned, glazed or unglazed products; all
composition materials, granite tiles, warning detectable tiles, cement tiles, epoxy composite materials, pavers, glass, mosaics, fiberglass, and all
substitute materials, for tile made in tile-like units; all mixtures in tile like form of cement, metals, and other materials that are for and intended
for use as a finished floor surface, stair treads, promenade roofs, walks, walls, ceilings, swimming pools, and all other places where tile is to form
a finished interior or exterior. The mixlng of all setting mortars including but not limited to thin-set mortars, epoxies, wall mud, and any other
sand and cement mixtures or adhesives when used in the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or similar materials. The
handling and unloading of all sand, cement, lime, tile, fixtures, equipment, adhesives, or any other materials to be used in the preparation,
installation, repair,or maintenance of tile and/orsimilar materials. Cera mic Tile Fin ishers shall fill alljoints and voids regardless of method on all
tile work, particularly and especially after installation of said tilework. Application ofanyand all protective coverings to alltypes oftile
installations including, but not be limited to, allsoap compounds, paper products, tapes, and all polyethylene coverings, plywood, masonite,
cardboard, and any new type of products that may be used to protect tile installations, Blastrac equipment, and all floor scarifying equipment
used in preparing floors to receive tile. The clean up and removal of all waste and materials. All demolition of existing tile floors and walls to be
re-tiled.
COMM UNICATIONS TECHNICIAN
Low voltage installation, maintenance and removal of telecommunication facilities (voice, sound, data and video) including telephone and data
inside wire, interconnect, terminal equipment, central offices, PABX, fiber optic cable and equipment, micro waves, V-sAT, bypass, CAW, WAN
(wide area networks), LAN (local area networks), and ISDN (integrated system digital network), pulling of wire in raceways, but not the
installation of raceways.
MARBLE FINISHER
Loading and unloading trucks, distribution of all materials (all stone, sand, etc.), stocking of floors with material, performing all rigging for heavy
work, the handling of all material that may be needed for the installation of such materials, building of scaffolding, polishing if needed, patching,
waxing of material if damaged, pointing up, caulking, grouting and cleaning of marble, holding water on diamond or Carborundum blade or saw
for setters cutting, use of tub saw or any other saw needed for preparation of material, drilling of holes for wires that anchor material set by
setters, mixing up of molding plaster for installation of material, mixing up thin set for the installation of material, mixing up of sand to cement
for the installation of material and such other work as may be required in helping a Marble Setter in the handling of all material in the erection
or installation of interior marble, slate, travertine, art marble, serpentine, alberene stone, blue stone, granite and other stones (meaning as to
stone any foreign or domestic materials as are specified and used in building interiors and exteriors and customarily known as stone in the
trade), carrara, sanionyx, vitrolite and similar opaque glass and the laying of all marble tile, terrazzo tile, slate tile and precast tile, steps, risers
treads, base, or any other materials that may be used as substitutes for any of the aforementioned materials and which are used on interior and
exterior which are installed in a similar manner.
MATERIAL TESTER l: Hand coring and drilling for testing of materials; field inspection of uncured concrete and asphalt.
MATERIAL TESTER ll: Field inspection of welds, structural steel, fireproofing, masonry, soil, facade, reinforcing steel, formwork, cured concrete,
and concrete and asphalt batch plants; adjusting proportions of bituminous mi)dures.
OPERATING ENGINEER . BUILDING
Class 1. Asphalt PlanU Asphalt Spreader; Autograde; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; Batch Plant; Benoto (requires Two Engineers); Boiler
and Throttle Valve; Caisson Rigs; Central Redi-Mix PlanU Combination Back Hoe Front Endloader Machine; Compressor and Throttle Valve;
Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Conveyor (Truck Mounted); Concrete Paver Over 27E cu. ft; Concrete Paver
27E cu.ll. and Under: Concrete Placer; Concrete Placing Boom; Concrete Pump (Truck Mounted); Concrete Tower; Cranes, All; Cranes,
Hammerhead; Cranes, (GCl and similar Type); Creter Crane; Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derricks, Alh Derricks, Traveling; Formless Curb
and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grouting Machines; Heavy Duty Self-Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover; Highlift Shovels or Front
Endloader 2-V4 yd. and over; Hoists, Elevators, outside type rack and pinion and similar machines; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Hoists,
Two Tugger One Floor; Hydraulic Backhoes; Hydraulic Boom Trucks; Hydro Vac (and similar equipment); Locomotives, All; Motor Patrol;
Lubrication Technician; Manipulators; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig; Post Hole Digger; Pre-Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; Pump Cretes:
Squeeze Cretes-Screw Type Pumps; Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Raised and Blind Hole Drill; Roto Mill 6rinder; Scoops - Tractor Drawn; Slip-Form
Paver; Straddle Buggies; Operation of Tie Back Machine; Tournapull; Tractor with Boom and Side Boom; Trenching Machines.
Class 2. Boilers; Broom, All Power Propelled; Bulldozers; Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable; Forklift Trucks; Highlift Shovels
or Front Endloaders under 2-1/4 yd.; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, lnside Elevators; Hoists, Sewer Dragging Machine; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum;
Laser Screed; Rock Drill (Self-Propelled); Rock Drill (Truck Mounted); Rollers, All; Steam Generators; Tractors, All; Tractor Drawn Vibratory Roller;
Winch Trucks with "A" Frame.
Class 3. Air Compressor; Combination Small Equipment Operator; Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hoists, lnside Elevators (remodeling or
renovation work); Hydraulic Power Units (Pile Driving, Extracting, and Drilling); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300 ft.); Low Boys;
Pumps, Well Points; Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches,4 Small Electric Drill Winches.
Class 4. Bobcats and/or other Skid Steer Loaders; Oilers; and Brick Forklift.
Class 5. Assistant Craft Foreman.
Class 5. Gradall.
Class 7. Mechanics; Welders.
OPERATING ENGINEERS - HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION
Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Heater and Planer Combination; Asphalt Heater Scarfire; Asphalt Spreader; Autograder/GOMACO or other similar
type machines: ABG Paver; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; Ballast Regulator; Belt Loader; Caisson Rigs; Car Dumper; Central Redi-Mix Plant;
Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine, (1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with attachments); Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted);
Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Paver over 27E cu. ft.; Concrete Placer; Concrete Tube Float; Cranes, all attachments; Cranes, Tower Cranes of all
types: Creter Crane: Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derricks, All; Derrick Boats; Derricks, Traveling; Dredges; Elevators, Outside type Rack &
Pinion and Similar Machines; Formless Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grader, Motor Grader, Motor Patrol, Auto Patrol, Form
Grader, Pull Grader, Subgrader; Guard Rail Post Driver Truck Mounted; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Heavy Duty Self-Propelled Transporter
or Prime Mover; Hydraulic Backhoes; Backhoes with shear attachments up to 40' of boom reach; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators; Mucking
Machine; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig; Pre-Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; Rock Drill - Crawler or Skid Rig; Rock Drill - Truck Mounted;
Rock/Track Tamper; Roto Mill Grinder; Slip-Form Paver; Snow Melters; Soil Test Drill Rig (Truck Mounted); Straddle Buggies; Hydraulic
Telescoping Form (Tunnel); Operation ofTieback Machine; Tractor Drawn Belt Loader; Tractor Drawn Belt Loader (with attached pusher - two
engineers); Tractor with Boom; Tractaire with Attachments; Traffic Barrier Transfer Machine; Trenching; Truck Mounted Concrete Pump with
Boom; Raised or Blind Hole Drills (Tunnel Shaft); Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines 5 ft. in diameter and over tunnel, etc;
Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines under 5 ft. in diameter; Wheel Excavator; Widener (APSCO).
Class 2. Batch Plant; Bituminous Mixer; Boiler and Throttle Valve; Bulldozers; Car Loader Trailing Conveyors; Combination Backhoe Front
Endloader Machine (Less than 1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with attachments); Compressor and Throttle Valve; Compressor, Common
Receiver (3); Concrete Breaker or Hydro Hammer; Concrete Grinding Machine; Concrete Mixer or Paver 75 Series to and including 27 cu. ft.;
Concrete Spreader; Concrete curing Machine, Burlap Machine, Belting Machine and Sealing Machine; concrete wheel Saw; Conveyor Muck Cars
(Haglund or Similar Type); Drills, All; Finishing Machine - Concrete; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader; Hoist - Sewer Dragging Machine;
Hydraulic Boom Trucks (All Attachments); Hydro-Blaster; Hydro Excavating (excluding hose work); Laser Screed; All Locomotives, Dinky; Off-Road
Hauling Units (including articulating) Non Self-LoadinB Eiection Dump; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes - Screw Type Pumps, Gypsum Bulker and
Pump; Roller, Asphalt; Rotary Snow Plows; Rototiller, Seaman, etc., self-propelled; Self-Propelled Compactof Spreader - Chip - Stone, etc.;
Scraper - Single/Twin Engine/Push and Pull; Scraper - Prime Mover in Tandem (Regardless of Size); Tractors pulling attachments, Sheeps Foot,
Disc, Compactor, etc.; Tug Boats.
Class 3. Boilers; Brooms, All Power Propelled; Cement Supply Tender; Compressor, Common Receiver (2); Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over);
Conveyor, Portable; Farm-Type Tractors Used for Mowing, Seeding, etc.; Forklift Trucks; Grouting Machine; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, All
Elevators; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Jeep Diggers; Low Boys; Pipe Jacking Machines; Post-Hole Digger; Power Saw, Concrete Power Driven; Pug
Mills; Rollers, other than Asphalt; Seed and Straw Blower; Steam Generators; Stump Machine; Winch Truck with "A" Frame; Work Boats;
Tamper-Form-Motor Driven.
Class 4. Air Compressor; Combination - Small Equipment Operator; Directional Boring Machine; Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hydraulic
Power Unit (Pile Driving, Extracting, or Drilling); Light Plants, All (1 through 5); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300 ft.); Pumps,
Well Points; Vacuum Trucks (excluding hose work); Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches,4 Small Electric DrillWinches.
Class 5. SkidSteer toader (all); Brick Forklifts; oilers.
Class 6. Field Mechanics and Field Weldes
Class 7. Dowell Machine with Air Compressor; Gradalland machines of like nature.
OPERATING ENGINEER - FLOATING
Diver. Diver Wet Tender, Diver Tender, ROV Pilot, ROV Tender
TRUCK DRIVER - BUILDING, HEAVY AND HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION
Class 1. Two or three Axle Trucks. A-frame Truck when used for transportation purposes; Air Compressors and Welding Machines, including
those pulled by cars, pick-up trucks and tractors; Ambulances; Batch Gate Lockers; Batch Hopperman; Car and Truck Washers; Carry-alls; Fork
Lifts and Hoisters; Helpers; Mechanics Helpers and Greasers; Oil Distributors 2-man operation; Pavement Breakers; Pole Trailer, up to 40 feet;
Power Mower Tractors; Self-propelled Chip Spreader; Skipman; Slurry Trucks, 2-man operation; Slurry Truck Conveyor Operation, 2 or 3 man;
Teamsters; Unskilled Dumpman; and Truck Drivers hauling warning lights, barricades, and portable toilets onthe job site.
Class 2. Four axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors under 7 yards; Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnapulls or
Turnatrailers when pulling other than self-loading equipment or similar equipment under 15 cubic yards; Mixer Trucks under 7 yeards; Ready-
mix Plant Hopper Operator, and Winch Trucks, 2 Axles.
Class 3. Five axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors 7 yards and over; Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnatrailers or
turnapulls when pulling other than self-loading equipment or similar equipment over 16 cubic yards; Explosives and/or Fission Material Truck;
Mixer Trucks 7 yards or over; Mobile Cranes while in transit; Oil Distributors, 1-man operation; Pole Trailer, over 40 feet; Pole and Expandable
Trailers hauling material over 50 feet long; Slurry trucks, 1-man operation; Winch trucks, 3 axles or more; Mechanic-Truck Welder and Truck
Painter.
Class 4. Six axle trucks; Dual-purpose vehicles, such as mounted crane trucks with hoist and accessories; Foreman; Master Mechanic; Self-
loading equipment like P.B. and trucks with scoops on the front.
TERRAZZO FINISH ER
The handling of sand, cement, marble chips, and all other materials that may be used by the Mosaic Terrazzo Mechanic, and the mixing,
grinding, grouting, cleaning and sealing of all Marble, Mosaic, and Terrazzo work, floors, base, stairs, and wainscoting by hand or machine, and in
addition, assistinB and aiding Marble, Masonic, and Terrazzo Mechanics.
Other Classifications of Work:
For definitions of classifications not otherwise set out, the Department generally has on file such definitions which are available. lf a task to be
performed is not subject to one ofthe classifications of pay set out, the Department will upon being contacted state which neighboring county
has such a classification and provide such rate, such rate being deemed to exist by reference in this document. lf no neighboring county rate
applies to the task, the Department shall undertake a special determination, such special determination being then deemed to have existed
under this determination. lf a project requires these, or any classification not listed, please contact IDOL at 2!7 -782-UlO for wage rates or
clarifications.
TANDSCAPING
Landscaping work falls under the existing classifications for laborer, operating engineer and truck driver. Thework performed by landscape
plantsmanand landscape laborer is covered bytheexisting classification of laborer. The work performed by landscape operators (regardless of
equipment used or its size) is covered by the classifications of operating engineer. The work performed by landscape truck drivers (regardless of
size of truck driven) is covered by the classifications of truck driver.
MATER!AL TESTER&MATERIAL TESTER/INSPECrORI AND∥
Notwithstanding the difference in the classification title′the classification entitled∥Material Testerl"involves the same job duties as the
classification entitled"Materia:Tester/lnspector l" Likewise′the classification entit:ed"Material Tester∥"involves the same,ob duties as the
classfication entt:ed"Matenal Tester/!nspector∥"
APPENDIX 2
PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
[insert contractor name and address here:]
as Principal (hereinafter called the "Contractor") and
[insert surety name and address here:]
organized and existing under the laws of the State of
(hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto Village of Oak
Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, as the obligee (hereinafter called the "Owner"), in
thefullandjustsumof[insertfullcontractpricehere:]$forthe
payment of which sum of money well and truly to be made, the Contractor and the Surety bind
themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally,
firmly by these presents, said amount to include payment of actual costs and damages and for attorneys'
fees, architectural fees, design fees, engineering fees, accounting fees, testing fees, consulting fees,
administrative costs, court costs, interest and any other fees and expenses resulting from or incurred by
reason of the Contractor's failure to promptly and faithfully perform its contract with the Owner, said
contract being more fully described below, and to include attorneys' fees, court costs and administrative
and other expenses necessarily paid or incurred in successfully enforcing performance of the obligation
ofthe Surety under this bond.
WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into a written agreement dated [insert contract date
here:l , 2Ol-, with the Owner titled [insert contract title here:]
".,n"r*n {,11i
set forth herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT if thE
Contractor shall well, truly, and promptly perform all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions,
and agreements of the Contractor under the contract, including but not limited to the Contractor's
obligations under the Contract, (1) to provide, perform, and complete at the Work Site and in the manner
specified in the Contract all necessary Work, labor, services, transportation, equipment, materials,
apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste disposal, information, data, and other
means and items necessary for [insert general description of the Work here:]
s
necessary in connection therewith [except as otherwise expressly provided in the Attachment
-
of
the Contractl; (3) to procure and furnish all bonds, certificates, and policies of insurance specified in
the Contract; (4) to pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes; (5) to do all other things required
of the Contractor by the Contract; and (6) to provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a
proper and workmanlike manner and in full compliance with, and as required by and pursuant to, the
Contract; all of which is herein referred to as the "'Work," whether or not any of the Work enter into and
become component parts of the improvement contemplated, then this obligation shall be null and void;
otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
APPENDIX 2
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no changes, modifications, alterations,
omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances on the part of the Owner or the
Contractor to the other in or to the terms of said Contract; in or to the schedules, plans, drawings, or
specifications; in or to the method or manner of perforrnance of the Work; in or to Owner-furnished
facilities, equipment, material, service, or site; or in or to the mode or manner of payment therefore shall
in any way release the Contractor and the Surety or either or any of them, or any of their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, or assigns, or affect the obligations of the Surety on this bond, all notice of
any and all of the foregoing changes, modifications, alterations, omissions, deletions, additions,
extensions of time, or forbearances and notice of any and all defaults by the Contractor or of the Owner's
termination of the Contractor being hereby waived by the Surety.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the foregoing paragraph, in no event shall the
obligations of the Surety under this bond in the event of the Conffactor's default be greater than the
obligations of the Contractor under the Contract in the absence of the Contractor default.
In the event of a default or defaults by the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to take
over and complete the Contract on 30 calendar days' written notice to the Surety, in which event the
Surety shall pay the Owner all costs incurred by the Owner in taking over and completing the Contract.
At its option, the Owner may instead request that the Surety take over and complete the Contract,
in which event the Surety shall take reasonable steps to proceed promptly with completion no later than
30 calendar days after the date on which the Owner notifies the Surety that the Owner wants the Surety
to take over and complete the Contract.
The Owner shall have no obligation to actually incur any expense or correct any deficient
performance of the Contractor to be entitled to receive the proceeds of this bond.
No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other
than the Owner or the heirs, executors, administrators, or successors of the Owner.
Signed and sealed this _ day of
AttesUlVitness:
By:
Titlc:
AttestAVitness:
By:
Title:
201
PRINCIPAL
SURETY
APPENDIX 3
LABOR AND ⅣIATERIALS PAYDIENT BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PuSENTS:
[insert contractor name and address here:]
as Principal (hereinafter called the "Contractor") and
[insert surety name and address here:]
organized and existing under the laws of the State of
(hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto Village of Oak
Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, as the obligee (hereinafter called the "Owner"), fot
the use and benefit of itself and of claimants as hereinafter defined (the "Claimants") in the full and just
sum of [insert fulI contract price here:] $to be paid to the Owner or the
Claimants or the Owner's or the Claimant's assigns, to which payment well and truly to be made the
Contractor and the Surety bind themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and
assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents, said amount to include attorney's fees, court
costs, and administrative and other expenses necessarily paid or incurred in successfully enforcing
performance of the obligation of the Surety under this bond.
WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into a written agreement dated [insert contract date
here:]201-, with the Owner titled [insert contract title here:]
"Contract"), the terms and conditions of which are by this reference incorporated herein as though fully
set forth herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT if thc
Contractor shall promptly pay or cause to be paid all sums of money that may be due to any Claimant
with respect to the Contractor's obligations under the Contract: (l) to provide, perform, and complete
at the Work Site and in the manner specified in the Contract all necessary Work, labor, services,
transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste
disposal, information, data and other means and items necessary for [insert general description of the
Work here:]
; (2) to procure and furnish all permits,
licenses, and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary in connection therewith
[except as otherwise expressly provided in Attachment A to the Contract]; (3) to procure and furnish
all Bonds and all certificates and policies of insurance specified in the Contract; (4) to pay all applicable
federal, state, and local taxes; (5) to do all other things required of the Contractor by the Contract; and
(6) to provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner and in
full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, the Contract; all of which is herein referred to
as the o''W'ork," whether or not any of said Work enter into and become component parts of the
improvement contemplated, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full
force and effect.
For purpose of this bond, a Claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the
Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to provide, perform, or complete any part of the
Work.
The Contractor and the Surety hereby jointly and severally agree that every Claimant that has
not had all just claims for the furnishing of any part of the Work paid in full, including without limitation
all claims for amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, rentals of or service or repairs on
machinery, equipment, and tools consumed or used in connection with the furnishing of any part of the
(the
A.PPENDIX 3
Work, may sue on this bond for the use of that Claimant, may prosecute the suit to final judgment for
such sum or sums as may be justly due that Claimant, and may have execution therein; provided,
however, that the Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit.
The provisions of 30 ILCS 550/1 and 2 of the Illinois Compiled Statutes shall be deemed inserted herein,
including the time limits within which notices of claim must be filed and actions brought under this
bond.
The Contractor and the Surety hereby jointly agree that the Owner may sue on this bond if the
Owner is held liable to, or voluntarily agrees to pay, any Claimant directly, but nothing in this bond shall
create any duty on the part of the Owner to pay any Claimant.
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no changes, modifications,
alterations, omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances on the part of the Owner
or the Contractor to the other in or to the terms of the Contract; in or to the schedules, plans, drawings,
or specifications; in or to the method or manner of performance of the Work; in or to Owner-furnished
facilities, equipment, material, service, or site; or in or to the mode or manner of payment therefor shall
in any way release the Contractor and the Surety or either or any of them, or any of their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, or assigns, or affect the obligations of the Surety on this bond, all notice of
any and all of the foregoing changes, modifications, alterations, omissions, deletions, additions,
extensions of time, or forbearances and notice of any and all defaults by the Contractor or of the Owner's
termination of the Contractor being hereby waived by the Surety.
Signed and sealed this
Attest/Witness:
day of 201
CONTRACTOR
By:
Titlc:
By:
Titlc:
Attest/Witness:SURETY
#34920193 v2